| //===--- ASTContext.cpp - Context to hold long-lived AST nodes ------------===// | 
 | // | 
 | //                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure | 
 | // | 
 | // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source | 
 | // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. | 
 | // | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | // | 
 | //  This file implements the ASTContext interface. | 
 | // | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | #include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/CharUnits.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/DeclCXX.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/DeclTemplate.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/TypeLoc.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/Expr.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/ExternalASTSource.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/ASTMutationListener.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/RecordLayout.h" | 
 | #include "clang/AST/Mangle.h" | 
 | #include "clang/Basic/Builtins.h" | 
 | #include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h" | 
 | #include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h" | 
 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallString.h" | 
 | #include "llvm/ADT/StringExtras.h" | 
 | #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h" | 
 | #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" | 
 | #include "CXXABI.h" | 
 |  | 
 | using namespace clang; | 
 |  | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructors; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructors; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructors; | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared; | 
 |  | 
 | enum FloatingRank { | 
 |   FloatRank, DoubleRank, LongDoubleRank | 
 | }; | 
 |  | 
 | void  | 
 | ASTContext::CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(llvm::FoldingSetNodeID &ID,  | 
 |                                                TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Parm) { | 
 |   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getDepth()); | 
 |   ID.AddInteger(Parm->getPosition()); | 
 |   ID.AddBoolean(Parm->isParameterPack()); | 
 |  | 
 |   TemplateParameterList *Params = Parm->getTemplateParameters(); | 
 |   ID.AddInteger(Params->size()); | 
 |   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),  | 
 |                                           PEnd = Params->end(); | 
 |        P != PEnd; ++P) { | 
 |     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) { | 
 |       ID.AddInteger(0); | 
 |       ID.AddBoolean(TTP->isParameterPack()); | 
 |       continue; | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) { | 
 |       ID.AddInteger(1); | 
 |       ID.AddBoolean(NTTP->isParameterPack()); | 
 |       ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getType().getAsOpaquePtr()); | 
 |       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) { | 
 |         ID.AddBoolean(true); | 
 |         ID.AddInteger(NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes()); | 
 |         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) | 
 |           ID.AddPointer(NTTP->getExpansionType(I).getAsOpaquePtr()); | 
 |       } else  | 
 |         ID.AddBoolean(false); | 
 |       continue; | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP = cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P); | 
 |     ID.AddInteger(2); | 
 |     Profile(ID, TTP); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | TemplateTemplateParmDecl * | 
 | ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl( | 
 |                                           TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP) const { | 
 |   // Check if we already have a canonical template template parameter. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm::Profile(ID, TTP); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm *Canonical | 
 |     = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (Canonical) | 
 |     return Canonical->getParam(); | 
 |    | 
 |   // Build a canonical template parameter list. | 
 |   TemplateParameterList *Params = TTP->getTemplateParameters(); | 
 |   llvm::SmallVector<NamedDecl *, 4> CanonParams; | 
 |   CanonParams.reserve(Params->size()); | 
 |   for (TemplateParameterList::const_iterator P = Params->begin(),  | 
 |                                           PEnd = Params->end(); | 
 |        P != PEnd; ++P) { | 
 |     if (TemplateTypeParmDecl *TTP = dyn_cast<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(*P)) | 
 |       CanonParams.push_back( | 
 |                   TemplateTypeParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),  | 
 |                                                SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(), | 
 |                                                TTP->getIndex(), 0, false, | 
 |                                                TTP->isParameterPack())); | 
 |     else if (NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *NTTP | 
 |              = dyn_cast<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(*P)) { | 
 |       QualType T = getCanonicalType(NTTP->getType()); | 
 |       TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(T); | 
 |       NonTypeTemplateParmDecl *Param; | 
 |       if (NTTP->isExpandedParameterPack()) { | 
 |         llvm::SmallVector<QualType, 2> ExpandedTypes; | 
 |         llvm::SmallVector<TypeSourceInfo *, 2> ExpandedTInfos; | 
 |         for (unsigned I = 0, N = NTTP->getNumExpansionTypes(); I != N; ++I) { | 
 |           ExpandedTypes.push_back(getCanonicalType(NTTP->getExpansionType(I))); | 
 |           ExpandedTInfos.push_back( | 
 |                                 getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(ExpandedTypes.back())); | 
 |         } | 
 |          | 
 |         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), | 
 |                                                 SourceLocation(),  | 
 |                                                 NTTP->getDepth(), | 
 |                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,  | 
 |                                                 T, | 
 |                                                 TInfo, | 
 |                                                 ExpandedTypes.data(), | 
 |                                                 ExpandedTypes.size(), | 
 |                                                 ExpandedTInfos.data()); | 
 |       } else { | 
 |         Param = NonTypeTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(), | 
 |                                                 SourceLocation(),  | 
 |                                                 NTTP->getDepth(), | 
 |                                                 NTTP->getPosition(), 0,  | 
 |                                                 T, | 
 |                                                 NTTP->isParameterPack(), | 
 |                                                 TInfo); | 
 |       } | 
 |       CanonParams.push_back(Param); | 
 |  | 
 |     } else | 
 |       CanonParams.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl( | 
 |                                            cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(*P))); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonTTP | 
 |     = TemplateTemplateParmDecl::Create(*this, getTranslationUnitDecl(),  | 
 |                                        SourceLocation(), TTP->getDepth(), | 
 |                                        TTP->getPosition(),  | 
 |                                        TTP->isParameterPack(), | 
 |                                        0, | 
 |                          TemplateParameterList::Create(*this, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                                        SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                                        CanonParams.data(), | 
 |                                                        CanonParams.size(), | 
 |                                                        SourceLocation())); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |   Canonical = CanonTemplateTemplateParms.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   assert(Canonical == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); | 
 |   (void)Canonical; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Create the canonical template template parameter entry. | 
 |   Canonical = new (*this) CanonicalTemplateTemplateParm(CanonTTP); | 
 |   CanonTemplateTemplateParms.InsertNode(Canonical, InsertPos); | 
 |   return CanonTTP; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | CXXABI *ASTContext::createCXXABI(const TargetInfo &T) { | 
 |   if (!LangOpts.CPlusPlus) return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   switch (T.getCXXABI()) { | 
 |   case CXXABI_ARM: | 
 |     return CreateARMCXXABI(*this); | 
 |   case CXXABI_Itanium: | 
 |     return CreateItaniumCXXABI(*this); | 
 |   case CXXABI_Microsoft: | 
 |     return CreateMicrosoftCXXABI(*this); | 
 |   } | 
 |   return 0; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | ASTContext::ASTContext(const LangOptions& LOpts, SourceManager &SM, | 
 |                        const TargetInfo &t, | 
 |                        IdentifierTable &idents, SelectorTable &sels, | 
 |                        Builtin::Context &builtins, | 
 |                        unsigned size_reserve) : | 
 |   TemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()), | 
 |   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes(this_()), | 
 |   GlobalNestedNameSpecifier(0), IsInt128Installed(false), | 
 |   CFConstantStringTypeDecl(0), NSConstantStringTypeDecl(0), | 
 |   ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl(0), FILEDecl(0), jmp_bufDecl(0), | 
 |   sigjmp_bufDecl(0), BlockDescriptorType(0), BlockDescriptorExtendedType(0), | 
 |   cudaConfigureCallDecl(0), | 
 |   NullTypeSourceInfo(QualType()), | 
 |   SourceMgr(SM), LangOpts(LOpts), ABI(createCXXABI(t)), Target(t), | 
 |   Idents(idents), Selectors(sels), | 
 |   BuiltinInfo(builtins), | 
 |   DeclarationNames(*this), | 
 |   ExternalSource(0), Listener(0), PrintingPolicy(LOpts), | 
 |   LastSDM(0, 0), | 
 |   UniqueBlockByRefTypeID(0), UniqueBlockParmTypeID(0) { | 
 |   ObjCIdRedefinitionType = QualType(); | 
 |   ObjCClassRedefinitionType = QualType(); | 
 |   ObjCSelRedefinitionType = QualType();     | 
 |   if (size_reserve > 0) Types.reserve(size_reserve); | 
 |   TUDecl = TranslationUnitDecl::Create(*this); | 
 |   InitBuiltinTypes(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | ASTContext::~ASTContext() { | 
 |   // Release the DenseMaps associated with DeclContext objects. | 
 |   // FIXME: Is this the ideal solution? | 
 |   ReleaseDeclContextMaps(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Call all of the deallocation functions. | 
 |   for (unsigned I = 0, N = Deallocations.size(); I != N; ++I) | 
 |     Deallocations[I].first(Deallocations[I].second); | 
 |    | 
 |   // Release all of the memory associated with overridden C++ methods. | 
 |   for (llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::iterator  | 
 |          OM = OverriddenMethods.begin(), OMEnd = OverriddenMethods.end(); | 
 |        OM != OMEnd; ++OM) | 
 |     OM->second.Destroy(); | 
 |    | 
 |   // ASTRecordLayout objects in ASTRecordLayouts must always be destroyed | 
 |   // because they can contain DenseMaps. | 
 |   for (llvm::DenseMap<const ObjCContainerDecl*, | 
 |        const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator | 
 |        I = ObjCLayouts.begin(), E = ObjCLayouts.end(); I != E; ) | 
 |     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory. | 
 |     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second)) | 
 |       R->Destroy(*this); | 
 |  | 
 |   for (llvm::DenseMap<const RecordDecl*, const ASTRecordLayout*>::iterator | 
 |        I = ASTRecordLayouts.begin(), E = ASTRecordLayouts.end(); I != E; ) { | 
 |     // Increment in loop to prevent using deallocated memory. | 
 |     if (ASTRecordLayout *R = const_cast<ASTRecordLayout*>((I++)->second)) | 
 |       R->Destroy(*this); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   for (llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator A = DeclAttrs.begin(), | 
 |                                                     AEnd = DeclAttrs.end(); | 
 |        A != AEnd; ++A) | 
 |     A->second->~AttrVec(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::AddDeallocation(void (*Callback)(void*), void *Data) { | 
 |   Deallocations.push_back(std::make_pair(Callback, Data)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void | 
 | ASTContext::setExternalSource(llvm::OwningPtr<ExternalASTSource> &Source) { | 
 |   ExternalSource.reset(Source.take()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::PrintStats() const { | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "*** AST Context Stats:\n"); | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "  %d types total.\n", (int)Types.size()); | 
 |  | 
 |   unsigned counts[] = { | 
 | #define TYPE(Name, Parent) 0, | 
 | #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent) | 
 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" | 
 |     0 // Extra | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   for (unsigned i = 0, e = Types.size(); i != e; ++i) { | 
 |     Type *T = Types[i]; | 
 |     counts[(unsigned)T->getTypeClass()]++; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   unsigned Idx = 0; | 
 |   unsigned TotalBytes = 0; | 
 | #define TYPE(Name, Parent)                                              \ | 
 |   if (counts[Idx])                                                      \ | 
 |     fprintf(stderr, "    %d %s types\n", (int)counts[Idx], #Name);      \ | 
 |   TotalBytes += counts[Idx] * sizeof(Name##Type);                       \ | 
 |   ++Idx; | 
 | #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Name, Parent) | 
 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" | 
 |  | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "Total bytes = %d\n", int(TotalBytes)); | 
 |    | 
 |   // Implicit special member functions. | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "  %u/%u implicit default constructors created\n", | 
 |           NumImplicitDefaultConstructorsDeclared,  | 
 |           NumImplicitDefaultConstructors); | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "  %u/%u implicit copy constructors created\n", | 
 |           NumImplicitCopyConstructorsDeclared,  | 
 |           NumImplicitCopyConstructors); | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "  %u/%u implicit copy assignment operators created\n", | 
 |           NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperatorsDeclared,  | 
 |           NumImplicitCopyAssignmentOperators); | 
 |   fprintf(stderr, "  %u/%u implicit destructors created\n", | 
 |           NumImplicitDestructorsDeclared, NumImplicitDestructors); | 
 |    | 
 |   if (ExternalSource.get()) { | 
 |     fprintf(stderr, "\n"); | 
 |     ExternalSource->PrintStats(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   BumpAlloc.PrintStats(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::InitBuiltinType(CanQualType &R, BuiltinType::Kind K) { | 
 |   BuiltinType *Ty = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BuiltinType(K); | 
 |   R = CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(QualType(Ty, 0)); | 
 |   Types.push_back(Ty); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::InitBuiltinTypes() { | 
 |   assert(VoidTy.isNull() && "Context reinitialized?"); | 
 |  | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p19. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(VoidTy,              BuiltinType::Void); | 
 |  | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p2. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(BoolTy,              BuiltinType::Bool); | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p3. | 
 |   if (LangOpts.CharIsSigned) | 
 |     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_S); | 
 |   else | 
 |     InitBuiltinType(CharTy,            BuiltinType::Char_U); | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p4. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(SignedCharTy,        BuiltinType::SChar); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(ShortTy,             BuiltinType::Short); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(IntTy,               BuiltinType::Int); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(LongTy,              BuiltinType::Long); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(LongLongTy,          BuiltinType::LongLong); | 
 |  | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p6. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedCharTy,      BuiltinType::UChar); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedShortTy,     BuiltinType::UShort); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedIntTy,       BuiltinType::UInt); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongTy,      BuiltinType::ULong); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedLongLongTy,  BuiltinType::ULongLong); | 
 |  | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p10. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(FloatTy,             BuiltinType::Float); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(DoubleTy,            BuiltinType::Double); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(LongDoubleTy,        BuiltinType::LongDouble); | 
 |  | 
 |   // GNU extension, 128-bit integers. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(Int128Ty,            BuiltinType::Int128); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UnsignedInt128Ty,    BuiltinType::UInt128); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) { // C++ 3.9.1p5 | 
 |     if (!LangOpts.ShortWChar) | 
 |       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_S); | 
 |     else  // -fshort-wchar makes wchar_t be unsigned. | 
 |       InitBuiltinType(WCharTy,           BuiltinType::WChar_U); | 
 |   } else // C99 | 
 |     WCharTy = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType()); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++ | 
 |     InitBuiltinType(Char16Ty,           BuiltinType::Char16); | 
 |   else // C99 | 
 |     Char16Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type()); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (LangOpts.CPlusPlus) // C++0x 3.9.1p5, extension for C++ | 
 |     InitBuiltinType(Char32Ty,           BuiltinType::Char32); | 
 |   else // C99 | 
 |     Char32Ty = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type()); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Placeholder type for type-dependent expressions whose type is | 
 |   // completely unknown. No code should ever check a type against | 
 |   // DependentTy and users should never see it; however, it is here to | 
 |   // help diagnose failures to properly check for type-dependent | 
 |   // expressions. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(DependentTy,         BuiltinType::Dependent); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Placeholder type for functions. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(OverloadTy,          BuiltinType::Overload); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Placeholder type for C++0x auto declarations whose real type has | 
 |   // not yet been deduced. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(UndeducedAutoTy,     BuiltinType::UndeducedAuto); | 
 |  | 
 |   // C99 6.2.5p11. | 
 |   FloatComplexTy      = getComplexType(FloatTy); | 
 |   DoubleComplexTy     = getComplexType(DoubleTy); | 
 |   LongDoubleComplexTy = getComplexType(LongDoubleTy); | 
 |  | 
 |   BuiltinVaListType = QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // "Builtin" typedefs set by Sema::ActOnTranslationUnitScope(). | 
 |   ObjCIdTypedefType = QualType(); | 
 |   ObjCClassTypedefType = QualType(); | 
 |   ObjCSelTypedefType = QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Builtin types for 'id', 'Class', and 'SEL'. | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinIdTy, BuiltinType::ObjCId); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinClassTy, BuiltinType::ObjCClass); | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(ObjCBuiltinSelTy, BuiltinType::ObjCSel); | 
 |  | 
 |   ObjCConstantStringType = QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // void * type | 
 |   VoidPtrTy = getPointerType(VoidTy); | 
 |  | 
 |   // nullptr type (C++0x 2.14.7) | 
 |   InitBuiltinType(NullPtrTy,           BuiltinType::NullPtr); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | Diagnostic &ASTContext::getDiagnostics() const { | 
 |   return SourceMgr.getDiagnostics(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | AttrVec& ASTContext::getDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) { | 
 |   AttrVec *&Result = DeclAttrs[D]; | 
 |   if (!Result) { | 
 |     void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(AttrVec)); | 
 |     Result = new (Mem) AttrVec; | 
 |   } | 
 |      | 
 |   return *Result; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Erase the attributes corresponding to the given declaration. | 
 | void ASTContext::eraseDeclAttrs(const Decl *D) {  | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<const Decl*, AttrVec*>::iterator Pos = DeclAttrs.find(D); | 
 |   if (Pos != DeclAttrs.end()) { | 
 |     Pos->second->~AttrVec(); | 
 |     DeclAttrs.erase(Pos); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | MemberSpecializationInfo * | 
 | ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(const VarDecl *Var) { | 
 |   assert(Var->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member"); | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl *, MemberSpecializationInfo *>::iterator Pos | 
 |     = InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.find(Var); | 
 |   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void | 
 | ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromStaticDataMember(VarDecl *Inst, VarDecl *Tmpl, | 
 |                                                 TemplateSpecializationKind TSK, | 
 |                                           SourceLocation PointOfInstantiation) { | 
 |   assert(Inst->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member"); | 
 |   assert(Tmpl->isStaticDataMember() && "Not a static data member"); | 
 |   assert(!InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst] && | 
 |          "Already noted what static data member was instantiated from"); | 
 |   InstantiatedFromStaticDataMember[Inst]  | 
 |     = new (*this) MemberSpecializationInfo(Tmpl, TSK, PointOfInstantiation); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | NamedDecl * | 
 | ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *UUD) { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<UsingDecl *, NamedDecl *>::const_iterator Pos | 
 |     = InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.find(UUD); | 
 |   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingDecl.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void | 
 | ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingDecl(UsingDecl *Inst, NamedDecl *Pattern) { | 
 |   assert((isa<UsingDecl>(Pattern) || | 
 |           isa<UnresolvedUsingValueDecl>(Pattern) || | 
 |           isa<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Pattern)) &&  | 
 |          "pattern decl is not a using decl"); | 
 |   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists"); | 
 |   InstantiatedFromUsingDecl[Inst] = Pattern; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | UsingShadowDecl * | 
 | ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst) { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<UsingShadowDecl*, UsingShadowDecl*>::const_iterator Pos | 
 |     = InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.find(Inst); | 
 |   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void | 
 | ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl(UsingShadowDecl *Inst, | 
 |                                                UsingShadowDecl *Pattern) { | 
 |   assert(!InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] && "pattern already exists"); | 
 |   InstantiatedFromUsingShadowDecl[Inst] = Pattern; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | FieldDecl *ASTContext::getInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Field) { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<FieldDecl *, FieldDecl *>::iterator Pos | 
 |     = InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.find(Field); | 
 |   if (Pos == InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setInstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl(FieldDecl *Inst, | 
 |                                                      FieldDecl *Tmpl) { | 
 |   assert(!Inst->getDeclName() && "Instantiated field decl is not unnamed"); | 
 |   assert(!Tmpl->getDeclName() && "Template field decl is not unnamed"); | 
 |   assert(!InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] && | 
 |          "Already noted what unnamed field was instantiated from"); | 
 |  | 
 |   InstantiatedFromUnnamedFieldDecl[Inst] = Tmpl; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator | 
 | ASTContext::overridden_methods_begin(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos | 
 |     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method); | 
 |   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second.begin(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | ASTContext::overridden_cxx_method_iterator | 
 | ASTContext::overridden_methods_end(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos | 
 |     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method); | 
 |   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second.end(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | unsigned | 
 | ASTContext::overridden_methods_size(const CXXMethodDecl *Method) const { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<const CXXMethodDecl *, CXXMethodVector>::const_iterator Pos | 
 |     = OverriddenMethods.find(Method); | 
 |   if (Pos == OverriddenMethods.end()) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   return Pos->second.size(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::addOverriddenMethod(const CXXMethodDecl *Method,  | 
 |                                      const CXXMethodDecl *Overridden) { | 
 |   OverriddenMethods[Method].push_back(Overridden); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                         Type Sizing and Analysis | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFloatTypeSemantics - Return the APFloat 'semantics' for the specified | 
 | /// scalar floating point type. | 
 | const llvm::fltSemantics &ASTContext::getFloatTypeSemantics(QualType T) const { | 
 |   const BuiltinType *BT = T->getAs<BuiltinType>(); | 
 |   assert(BT && "Not a floating point type!"); | 
 |   switch (BT->getKind()) { | 
 |   default: assert(0 && "Not a floating point type!"); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Float:      return Target.getFloatFormat(); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Double:     return Target.getDoubleFormat(); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return Target.getLongDoubleFormat(); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getDeclAlign - Return a conservative estimate of the alignment of the | 
 | /// specified decl.  Note that bitfields do not have a valid alignment, so | 
 | /// this method will assert on them. | 
 | /// If @p RefAsPointee, references are treated like their underlying type | 
 | /// (for alignof), else they're treated like pointers (for CodeGen). | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::getDeclAlign(const Decl *D, bool RefAsPointee) const { | 
 |   unsigned Align = Target.getCharWidth(); | 
 |  | 
 |   bool UseAlignAttrOnly = false; | 
 |   if (unsigned AlignFromAttr = D->getMaxAlignment()) { | 
 |     Align = AlignFromAttr; | 
 |  | 
 |     // __attribute__((aligned)) can increase or decrease alignment | 
 |     // *except* on a struct or struct member, where it only increases | 
 |     // alignment unless 'packed' is also specified. | 
 |     // | 
 |     // It is an error for [[align]] to decrease alignment, so we can | 
 |     // ignore that possibility;  Sema should diagnose it. | 
 |     if (isa<FieldDecl>(D)) { | 
 |       UseAlignAttrOnly = D->hasAttr<PackedAttr>() || | 
 |         cast<FieldDecl>(D)->getParent()->hasAttr<PackedAttr>(); | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       UseAlignAttrOnly = true; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we're using the align attribute only, just ignore everything | 
 |   // else about the declaration and its type. | 
 |   if (UseAlignAttrOnly) { | 
 |     // do nothing | 
 |  | 
 |   } else if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D)) { | 
 |     QualType T = VD->getType(); | 
 |     if (const ReferenceType* RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) { | 
 |       if (RefAsPointee) | 
 |         T = RT->getPointeeType(); | 
 |       else | 
 |         T = getPointerType(RT->getPointeeType()); | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (!T->isIncompleteType() && !T->isFunctionType()) { | 
 |       // Adjust alignments of declarations with array type by the | 
 |       // large-array alignment on the target. | 
 |       unsigned MinWidth = Target.getLargeArrayMinWidth(); | 
 |       const ArrayType *arrayType; | 
 |       if (MinWidth && (arrayType = getAsArrayType(T))) { | 
 |         if (isa<VariableArrayType>(arrayType)) | 
 |           Align = std::max(Align, Target.getLargeArrayAlign()); | 
 |         else if (isa<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType) && | 
 |                  MinWidth <= getTypeSize(cast<ConstantArrayType>(arrayType))) | 
 |           Align = std::max(Align, Target.getLargeArrayAlign()); | 
 |  | 
 |         // Walk through any array types while we're at it. | 
 |         T = getBaseElementType(arrayType); | 
 |       } | 
 |       Align = std::max(Align, getPreferredTypeAlign(T.getTypePtr())); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     // Fields can be subject to extra alignment constraints, like if | 
 |     // the field is packed, the struct is packed, or the struct has a | 
 |     // a max-field-alignment constraint (#pragma pack).  So calculate | 
 |     // the actual alignment of the field within the struct, and then | 
 |     // (as we're expected to) constrain that by the alignment of the type. | 
 |     if (const FieldDecl *field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(VD)) { | 
 |       // So calculate the alignment of the field. | 
 |       const ASTRecordLayout &layout = getASTRecordLayout(field->getParent()); | 
 |  | 
 |       // Start with the record's overall alignment. | 
 |       unsigned fieldAlign = toBits(layout.getAlignment()); | 
 |  | 
 |       // Use the GCD of that and the offset within the record. | 
 |       uint64_t offset = layout.getFieldOffset(field->getFieldIndex()); | 
 |       if (offset > 0) { | 
 |         // Alignment is always a power of 2, so the GCD will be a power of 2, | 
 |         // which means we get to do this crazy thing instead of Euclid's. | 
 |         uint64_t lowBitOfOffset = offset & (~offset + 1); | 
 |         if (lowBitOfOffset < fieldAlign) | 
 |           fieldAlign = static_cast<unsigned>(lowBitOfOffset); | 
 |       } | 
 |  | 
 |       Align = std::min(Align, fieldAlign); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return toCharUnitsFromBits(Align); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> | 
 | ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(const Type *T) { | 
 |   std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info = getTypeInfo(T); | 
 |   return std::make_pair(toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.first), | 
 |                         toCharUnitsFromBits(Info.second)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | std::pair<CharUnits, CharUnits> | 
 | ASTContext::getTypeInfoInChars(QualType T) { | 
 |   return getTypeInfoInChars(T.getTypePtr()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypeSize - Return the size of the specified type, in bits.  This method | 
 | /// does not work on incomplete types. | 
 | /// | 
 | /// FIXME: Pointers into different addr spaces could have different sizes and | 
 | /// alignment requirements: getPointerInfo should take an AddrSpace, this | 
 | /// should take a QualType, &c. | 
 | std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> | 
 | ASTContext::getTypeInfo(const Type *T) const { | 
 |   uint64_t Width=0; | 
 |   unsigned Align=8; | 
 |   switch (T->getTypeClass()) { | 
 | #define TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: | 
 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" | 
 |     assert(false && "Should not see dependent types"); | 
 |     break; | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::FunctionNoProto: | 
 |   case Type::FunctionProto: | 
 |     // GCC extension: alignof(function) = 32 bits | 
 |     Width = 0; | 
 |     Align = 32; | 
 |     break; | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::IncompleteArray: | 
 |   case Type::VariableArray: | 
 |     Width = 0; | 
 |     Align = getTypeAlign(cast<ArrayType>(T)->getElementType()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::ConstantArray: { | 
 |     const ConstantArrayType *CAT = cast<ConstantArrayType>(T); | 
 |  | 
 |     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(CAT->getElementType()); | 
 |     Width = EltInfo.first*CAT->getSize().getZExtValue(); | 
 |     Align = EltInfo.second; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::ExtVector: | 
 |   case Type::Vector: { | 
 |     const VectorType *VT = cast<VectorType>(T); | 
 |     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = getTypeInfo(VT->getElementType()); | 
 |     Width = EltInfo.first*VT->getNumElements(); | 
 |     Align = Width; | 
 |     // If the alignment is not a power of 2, round up to the next power of 2. | 
 |     // This happens for non-power-of-2 length vectors. | 
 |     if (Align & (Align-1)) { | 
 |       Align = llvm::NextPowerOf2(Align); | 
 |       Width = llvm::RoundUpToAlignment(Width, Align); | 
 |     } | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Builtin: | 
 |     switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) { | 
 |     default: assert(0 && "Unknown builtin type!"); | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Void: | 
 |       // GCC extension: alignof(void) = 8 bits. | 
 |       Width = 0; | 
 |       Align = 8; | 
 |       break; | 
 |  | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Bool: | 
 |       Width = Target.getBoolWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getBoolAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Char_S: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Char_U: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UChar: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::SChar: | 
 |       Width = Target.getCharWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getCharAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::WChar_S: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::WChar_U: | 
 |       Width = Target.getWCharWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getWCharAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Char16: | 
 |       Width = Target.getChar16Width(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getChar16Align(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Char32: | 
 |       Width = Target.getChar32Width(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getChar32Align(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UShort: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Short: | 
 |       Width = Target.getShortWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getShortAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UInt: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Int: | 
 |       Width = Target.getIntWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getIntAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ULong: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Long: | 
 |       Width = Target.getLongWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getLongAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ULongLong: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::LongLong: | 
 |       Width = Target.getLongLongWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getLongLongAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Int128: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UInt128: | 
 |       Width = 128; | 
 |       Align = 128; // int128_t is 128-bit aligned on all targets. | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Float: | 
 |       Width = Target.getFloatWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getFloatAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Double: | 
 |       Width = Target.getDoubleWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getDoubleAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: | 
 |       Width = Target.getLongDoubleWidth(); | 
 |       Align = Target.getLongDoubleAlign(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::NullPtr: | 
 |       Width = Target.getPointerWidth(0); // C++ 3.9.1p11: sizeof(nullptr_t) | 
 |       Align = Target.getPointerAlign(0); //   == sizeof(void*) | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ObjCId: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ObjCClass: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ObjCSel: | 
 |       Width = Target.getPointerWidth(0);  | 
 |       Align = Target.getPointerAlign(0); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     } | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: | 
 |     Width = Target.getPointerWidth(0); | 
 |     Align = Target.getPointerAlign(0); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case Type::BlockPointer: { | 
 |     unsigned AS = cast<BlockPointerType>(T)->getPointeeType().getAddressSpace(); | 
 |     Width = Target.getPointerWidth(AS); | 
 |     Align = Target.getPointerAlign(AS); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::LValueReference: | 
 |   case Type::RValueReference: { | 
 |     // alignof and sizeof should never enter this code path here, so we go | 
 |     // the pointer route. | 
 |     unsigned AS = cast<ReferenceType>(T)->getPointeeType().getAddressSpace(); | 
 |     Width = Target.getPointerWidth(AS); | 
 |     Align = Target.getPointerAlign(AS); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::Pointer: { | 
 |     unsigned AS = cast<PointerType>(T)->getPointeeType().getAddressSpace(); | 
 |     Width = Target.getPointerWidth(AS); | 
 |     Align = Target.getPointerAlign(AS); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::MemberPointer: { | 
 |     const MemberPointerType *MPT = cast<MemberPointerType>(T); | 
 |     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> PtrDiffInfo = | 
 |       getTypeInfo(getPointerDiffType()); | 
 |     Width = PtrDiffInfo.first * ABI->getMemberPointerSize(MPT); | 
 |     Align = PtrDiffInfo.second; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::Complex: { | 
 |     // Complex types have the same alignment as their elements, but twice the | 
 |     // size. | 
 |     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> EltInfo = | 
 |       getTypeInfo(cast<ComplexType>(T)->getElementType()); | 
 |     Width = EltInfo.first*2; | 
 |     Align = EltInfo.second; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::ObjCObject: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<ObjCObjectType>(T)->getBaseType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |   case Type::ObjCInterface: { | 
 |     const ObjCInterfaceType *ObjCI = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(T); | 
 |     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(ObjCI->getDecl()); | 
 |     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize()); | 
 |     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::Record: | 
 |   case Type::Enum: { | 
 |     const TagType *TT = cast<TagType>(T); | 
 |  | 
 |     if (TT->getDecl()->isInvalidDecl()) { | 
 |       Width = 1; | 
 |       Align = 1; | 
 |       break; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(TT)) | 
 |       return getTypeInfo(ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType()); | 
 |  | 
 |     const RecordType *RT = cast<RecordType>(TT); | 
 |     const ASTRecordLayout &Layout = getASTRecordLayout(RT->getDecl()); | 
 |     Width = toBits(Layout.getSize()); | 
 |     Align = toBits(Layout.getAlignment()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParm: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<SubstTemplateTypeParmType>(T)-> | 
 |                        getReplacementType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Paren: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<ParenType>(T)->getInnerType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Typedef: { | 
 |     const TypedefDecl *Typedef = cast<TypedefType>(T)->getDecl(); | 
 |     std::pair<uint64_t, unsigned> Info | 
 |       = getTypeInfo(Typedef->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |     // If the typedef has an aligned attribute on it, it overrides any computed | 
 |     // alignment we have.  This violates the GCC documentation (which says that | 
 |     // attribute(aligned) can only round up) but matches its implementation. | 
 |     if (unsigned AttrAlign = Typedef->getMaxAlignment()) | 
 |       Align = AttrAlign; | 
 |     else | 
 |       Align = Info.second; | 
 |     Width = Info.first; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::TypeOfExpr: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfExprType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType() | 
 |                          .getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::TypeOf: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<TypeOfType>(T)->getUnderlyingType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Decltype: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<DecltypeType>(T)->getUnderlyingExpr()->getType() | 
 |                         .getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Elaborated: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(cast<ElaboratedType>(T)->getNamedType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Attributed: | 
 |     return getTypeInfo( | 
 |                   cast<AttributedType>(T)->getEquivalentType().getTypePtr()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: | 
 |     assert(getCanonicalType(T) != T && | 
 |            "Cannot request the size of a dependent type"); | 
 |     // FIXME: this is likely to be wrong once we support template | 
 |     // aliases, since a template alias could refer to a typedef that | 
 |     // has an __aligned__ attribute on it. | 
 |     return getTypeInfo(getCanonicalType(T)); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(Align && (Align & (Align-1)) == 0 && "Alignment must be power of 2"); | 
 |   return std::make_pair(Width, Align); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// toCharUnitsFromBits - Convert a size in bits to a size in characters. | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::toCharUnitsFromBits(int64_t BitSize) const { | 
 |   return CharUnits::fromQuantity(BitSize / getCharWidth()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// toBits - Convert a size in characters to a size in characters. | 
 | int64_t ASTContext::toBits(CharUnits CharSize) const { | 
 |   return CharSize.getQuantity() * getCharWidth(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypeSizeInChars - Return the size of the specified type, in characters. | 
 | /// This method does not work on incomplete types. | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(QualType T) const { | 
 |   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T)); | 
 | } | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeSizeInChars(const Type *T) const { | 
 |   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeSize(T)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypeAlignInChars - Return the ABI-specified alignment of a type, in  | 
 | /// characters. This method does not work on incomplete types. | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(QualType T) const { | 
 |   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T)); | 
 | } | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::getTypeAlignInChars(const Type *T) const { | 
 |   return toCharUnitsFromBits(getTypeAlign(T)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getPreferredTypeAlign - Return the "preferred" alignment of the specified | 
 | /// type for the current target in bits.  This can be different than the ABI | 
 | /// alignment in cases where it is beneficial for performance to overalign | 
 | /// a data type. | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::getPreferredTypeAlign(const Type *T) const { | 
 |   unsigned ABIAlign = getTypeAlign(T); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Double and long long should be naturally aligned if possible. | 
 |   if (const ComplexType* CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) | 
 |     T = CT->getElementType().getTypePtr(); | 
 |   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Double) || | 
 |       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::LongLong)) | 
 |     return std::max(ABIAlign, (unsigned)getTypeSize(T)); | 
 |  | 
 |   return ABIAlign; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// ShallowCollectObjCIvars - | 
 | /// Collect all ivars, including those synthesized, in the current class. | 
 | /// | 
 | void ASTContext::ShallowCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI, | 
 |                             llvm::SmallVectorImpl<ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const { | 
 |   // FIXME. This need be removed but there are two many places which | 
 |   // assume const-ness of ObjCInterfaceDecl | 
 |   ObjCInterfaceDecl *IDecl = const_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl *>(OI); | 
 |   for (ObjCIvarDecl *Iv = IDecl->all_declared_ivar_begin(); Iv;  | 
 |         Iv= Iv->getNextIvar()) | 
 |     Ivars.push_back(Iv); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// DeepCollectObjCIvars - | 
 | /// This routine first collects all declared, but not synthesized, ivars in | 
 | /// super class and then collects all ivars, including those synthesized for | 
 | /// current class. This routine is used for implementation of current class | 
 | /// when all ivars, declared and synthesized are known. | 
 | /// | 
 | void ASTContext::DeepCollectObjCIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI, | 
 |                                       bool leafClass, | 
 |                             llvm::SmallVectorImpl<ObjCIvarDecl*> &Ivars) const { | 
 |   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *SuperClass = OI->getSuperClass()) | 
 |     DeepCollectObjCIvars(SuperClass, false, Ivars); | 
 |   if (!leafClass) { | 
 |     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::ivar_iterator I = OI->ivar_begin(), | 
 |          E = OI->ivar_end(); I != E; ++I) | 
 |       Ivars.push_back(*I); | 
 |   } | 
 |   else | 
 |     ShallowCollectObjCIvars(OI, Ivars); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// CollectInheritedProtocols - Collect all protocols in current class and | 
 | /// those inherited by it. | 
 | void ASTContext::CollectInheritedProtocols(const Decl *CDecl, | 
 |                           llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> &Protocols) { | 
 |   if (const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = dyn_cast<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(CDecl)) { | 
 |     // We can use protocol_iterator here instead of | 
 |     // all_referenced_protocol_iterator since we are walking all categories.     | 
 |     for (ObjCInterfaceDecl::all_protocol_iterator P = OI->all_referenced_protocol_begin(), | 
 |          PE = OI->all_referenced_protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { | 
 |       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P); | 
 |       Protocols.insert(Proto); | 
 |       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(), | 
 |            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { | 
 |         Protocols.insert(*P); | 
 |         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols); | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     // Categories of this Interface. | 
 |     for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDeclChain = OI->getCategoryList();  | 
 |          CDeclChain; CDeclChain = CDeclChain->getNextClassCategory()) | 
 |       CollectInheritedProtocols(CDeclChain, Protocols); | 
 |     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *SD = OI->getSuperClass()) | 
 |       while (SD) { | 
 |         CollectInheritedProtocols(SD, Protocols); | 
 |         SD = SD->getSuperClass(); | 
 |       } | 
 |   } else if (const ObjCCategoryDecl *OC = dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryDecl>(CDecl)) { | 
 |     for (ObjCCategoryDecl::protocol_iterator P = OC->protocol_begin(), | 
 |          PE = OC->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { | 
 |       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P); | 
 |       Protocols.insert(Proto); | 
 |       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(), | 
 |            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) | 
 |         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } else if (const ObjCProtocolDecl *OP = dyn_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl>(CDecl)) { | 
 |     for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = OP->protocol_begin(), | 
 |          PE = OP->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) { | 
 |       ObjCProtocolDecl *Proto = (*P); | 
 |       Protocols.insert(Proto); | 
 |       for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator P = Proto->protocol_begin(), | 
 |            PE = Proto->protocol_end(); P != PE; ++P) | 
 |         CollectInheritedProtocols(*P, Protocols); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::CountNonClassIvars(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI) const { | 
 |   unsigned count = 0;   | 
 |   // Count ivars declared in class extension. | 
 |   for (const ObjCCategoryDecl *CDecl = OI->getFirstClassExtension(); CDecl; | 
 |        CDecl = CDecl->getNextClassExtension()) | 
 |     count += CDecl->ivar_size(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Count ivar defined in this class's implementation.  This | 
 |   // includes synthesized ivars. | 
 |   if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplDecl = OI->getImplementation()) | 
 |     count += ImplDecl->ivar_size(); | 
 |  | 
 |   return count; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl,or NULL if none exists. | 
 | ObjCImplementationDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator | 
 |     I = ObjCImpls.find(D); | 
 |   if (I != ObjCImpls.end()) | 
 |     return cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(I->second); | 
 |   return 0; | 
 | } | 
 | /// \brief Get the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl, or NULL if none exists. | 
 | ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ASTContext::getObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *D) { | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<ObjCContainerDecl*, ObjCImplDecl*>::iterator | 
 |     I = ObjCImpls.find(D); | 
 |   if (I != ObjCImpls.end()) | 
 |     return cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(I->second); | 
 |   return 0; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCInterfaceDecl. | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFaceD, | 
 |                            ObjCImplementationDecl *ImplD) { | 
 |   assert(IFaceD && ImplD && "Passed null params"); | 
 |   ObjCImpls[IFaceD] = ImplD; | 
 | } | 
 | /// \brief Set the implementation of ObjCCategoryDecl. | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCImplementation(ObjCCategoryDecl *CatD, | 
 |                            ObjCCategoryImplDecl *ImplD) { | 
 |   assert(CatD && ImplD && "Passed null params"); | 
 |   ObjCImpls[CatD] = ImplD; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Get the copy initialization expression of VarDecl,or NULL if  | 
 | /// none exists. | 
 | Expr *ASTContext::getBlockVarCopyInits(const VarDecl*VD) { | 
 |   assert(VD && "Passed null params"); | 
 |   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&  | 
 |          "getBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var"); | 
 |   llvm::DenseMap<const VarDecl*, Expr*>::iterator | 
 |     I = BlockVarCopyInits.find(VD); | 
 |   return (I != BlockVarCopyInits.end()) ? cast<Expr>(I->second) : 0; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Set the copy inialization expression of a block var decl. | 
 | void ASTContext::setBlockVarCopyInits(VarDecl*VD, Expr* Init) { | 
 |   assert(VD && Init && "Passed null params"); | 
 |   assert(VD->hasAttr<BlocksAttr>() &&  | 
 |          "setBlockVarCopyInits - not __block var"); | 
 |   BlockVarCopyInits[VD] = Init; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Allocate an uninitialized TypeSourceInfo. | 
 | /// | 
 | /// The caller should initialize the memory held by TypeSourceInfo using | 
 | /// the TypeLoc wrappers. | 
 | /// | 
 | /// \param T the type that will be the basis for type source info. This type | 
 | /// should refer to how the declarator was written in source code, not to | 
 | /// what type semantic analysis resolved the declarator to. | 
 | TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::CreateTypeSourceInfo(QualType T, | 
 |                                                  unsigned DataSize) const { | 
 |   if (!DataSize) | 
 |     DataSize = TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T); | 
 |   else | 
 |     assert(DataSize == TypeLoc::getFullDataSizeForType(T) && | 
 |            "incorrect data size provided to CreateTypeSourceInfo!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   TypeSourceInfo *TInfo = | 
 |     (TypeSourceInfo*)BumpAlloc.Allocate(sizeof(TypeSourceInfo) + DataSize, 8); | 
 |   new (TInfo) TypeSourceInfo(T); | 
 |   return TInfo; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | TypeSourceInfo *ASTContext::getTrivialTypeSourceInfo(QualType T, | 
 |                                                      SourceLocation L) const { | 
 |   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(T); | 
 |   DI->getTypeLoc().initialize(const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this), L); | 
 |   return DI; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | const ASTRecordLayout & | 
 | ASTContext::getASTObjCInterfaceLayout(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *D) const { | 
 |   return getObjCLayout(D, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | const ASTRecordLayout & | 
 | ASTContext::getASTObjCImplementationLayout( | 
 |                                         const ObjCImplementationDecl *D) const { | 
 |   return getObjCLayout(D->getClassInterface(), D); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                   Type creation/memoization methods | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getExtQualType(const Type *baseType, Qualifiers quals) const { | 
 |   unsigned fastQuals = quals.getFastQualifiers(); | 
 |   quals.removeFastQualifiers(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Check if we've already instantiated this type. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ExtQuals::Profile(ID, baseType, quals); | 
 |   void *insertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (ExtQuals *eq = ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) { | 
 |     assert(eq->getQualifiers() == quals); | 
 |     return QualType(eq, fastQuals); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the base type is not canonical, make the appropriate canonical type. | 
 |   QualType canon; | 
 |   if (!baseType->isCanonicalUnqualified()) { | 
 |     SplitQualType canonSplit = baseType->getCanonicalTypeInternal().split(); | 
 |     canonSplit.second.addConsistentQualifiers(quals); | 
 |     canon = getExtQualType(canonSplit.first, canonSplit.second); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Re-find the insert position. | 
 |     (void) ExtQualNodes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   ExtQuals *eq = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ExtQuals(baseType, canon, quals); | 
 |   ExtQualNodes.InsertNode(eq, insertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(eq, fastQuals); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getAddrSpaceQualType(QualType T, unsigned AddressSpace) const { | 
 |   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T); | 
 |   if (CanT.getAddressSpace() == AddressSpace) | 
 |     return T; | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together | 
 |   // into one ExtQuals node. | 
 |   QualifierCollector Quals; | 
 |   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If this type already has an address space specified, it cannot get | 
 |   // another one. | 
 |   assert(!Quals.hasAddressSpace() && | 
 |          "Type cannot be in multiple addr spaces!"); | 
 |   Quals.addAddressSpace(AddressSpace); | 
 |  | 
 |   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getObjCGCQualType(QualType T, | 
 |                                        Qualifiers::GC GCAttr) const { | 
 |   QualType CanT = getCanonicalType(T); | 
 |   if (CanT.getObjCGCAttr() == GCAttr) | 
 |     return T; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const PointerType *ptr = T->getAs<PointerType>()) { | 
 |     QualType Pointee = ptr->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     if (Pointee->isAnyPointerType()) { | 
 |       QualType ResultType = getObjCGCQualType(Pointee, GCAttr); | 
 |       return getPointerType(ResultType); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we are composing extended qualifiers together, merge together | 
 |   // into one ExtQuals node. | 
 |   QualifierCollector Quals; | 
 |   const Type *TypeNode = Quals.strip(T); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If this type already has an ObjCGC specified, it cannot get | 
 |   // another one. | 
 |   assert(!Quals.hasObjCGCAttr() && | 
 |          "Type cannot have multiple ObjCGCs!"); | 
 |   Quals.addObjCGCAttr(GCAttr); | 
 |  | 
 |   return getExtQualType(TypeNode, Quals); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | const FunctionType *ASTContext::adjustFunctionType(const FunctionType *T, | 
 |                                                    FunctionType::ExtInfo Info) { | 
 |   if (T->getExtInfo() == Info) | 
 |     return T; | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Result; | 
 |   if (const FunctionNoProtoType *FNPT = dyn_cast<FunctionNoProtoType>(T)) { | 
 |     Result = getFunctionNoProtoType(FNPT->getResultType(), Info); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(T); | 
 |     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo(); | 
 |     EPI.ExtInfo = Info; | 
 |     Result = getFunctionType(FPT->getResultType(), FPT->arg_type_begin(), | 
 |                              FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return cast<FunctionType>(Result.getTypePtr()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getComplexType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a complex | 
 | /// number with the specified element type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getComplexType(QualType T) const { | 
 |   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ComplexType::Profile(ID, T); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (ComplexType *CT = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(CT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, | 
 |   // so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!T.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getComplexType(getCanonicalType(T)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     ComplexType *NewIP = ComplexTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |   ComplexType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) ComplexType(T, Canonical); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   ComplexTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a pointer to | 
 | /// the specified type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getPointerType(QualType T) const { | 
 |   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   PointerType::Profile(ID, T); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (PointerType *PT = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(PT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, | 
 |   // so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!T.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getPointerType(getCanonicalType(T)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     PointerType *NewIP = PointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |   PointerType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) PointerType(T, Canonical); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   PointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getBlockPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for | 
 | /// a pointer to the specified block. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getBlockPointerType(QualType T) const { | 
 |   assert(T->isFunctionType() && "block of function types only"); | 
 |   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one block of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   BlockPointerType::Profile(ID, T); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (BlockPointerType *PT = | 
 |         BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(PT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the block pointee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical | 
 |   // type either so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!T.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getBlockPointerType(getCanonicalType(T)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     BlockPointerType *NewIP = | 
 |       BlockPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |   BlockPointerType *New | 
 |     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) BlockPointerType(T, Canonical); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   BlockPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getLValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an | 
 | /// lvalue reference to the specified type. | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getLValueReferenceType(QualType T, bool SpelledAsLValue) const { | 
 |   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, SpelledAsLValue); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (LValueReferenceType *RT = | 
 |         LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(RT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type | 
 |   // either, so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!SpelledAsLValue || InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T); | 
 |     Canonical = getLValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     LValueReferenceType *NewIP = | 
 |       LValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   LValueReferenceType *New | 
 |     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) LValueReferenceType(T, Canonical, | 
 |                                                      SpelledAsLValue); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   LValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getRValueReferenceType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for an | 
 | /// rvalue reference to the specified type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getRValueReferenceType(QualType T) const { | 
 |   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ReferenceType::Profile(ID, T, false); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (RValueReferenceType *RT = | 
 |         RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(RT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   const ReferenceType *InnerRef = T->getAs<ReferenceType>(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the referencee type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type | 
 |   // either, so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (InnerRef || !T.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     QualType PointeeType = (InnerRef ? InnerRef->getPointeeType() : T); | 
 |     Canonical = getRValueReferenceType(getCanonicalType(PointeeType)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     RValueReferenceType *NewIP = | 
 |       RValueReferenceTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   RValueReferenceType *New | 
 |     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RValueReferenceType(T, Canonical); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   RValueReferenceTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getMemberPointerType - Return the uniqued reference to the type for a | 
 | /// member pointer to the specified type, in the specified class. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getMemberPointerType(QualType T, const Type *Cls) const { | 
 |   // Unique pointers, to guarantee there is only one pointer of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   MemberPointerType::Profile(ID, T, Cls); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (MemberPointerType *PT = | 
 |       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(PT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the pointee or class type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical | 
 |   // type either, so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!T.isCanonical() || !Cls->isCanonicalUnqualified()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getMemberPointerType(getCanonicalType(T),getCanonicalType(Cls)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     MemberPointerType *NewIP = | 
 |       MemberPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |   MemberPointerType *New | 
 |     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) MemberPointerType(T, Cls, Canonical); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   MemberPointerTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getConstantArrayType - Return the unique reference to the type for an | 
 | /// array of the specified element type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getConstantArrayType(QualType EltTy, | 
 |                                           const llvm::APInt &ArySizeIn, | 
 |                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, | 
 |                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals) const { | 
 |   assert((EltTy->isDependentType() || | 
 |           EltTy->isIncompleteType() || EltTy->isConstantSizeType()) && | 
 |          "Constant array of VLAs is illegal!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Convert the array size into a canonical width matching the pointer size for | 
 |   // the target. | 
 |   llvm::APInt ArySize(ArySizeIn); | 
 |   ArySize = | 
 |     ArySize.zextOrTrunc(Target.getPointerWidth(EltTy.getAddressSpace())); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ConstantArrayType::Profile(ID, EltTy, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (ConstantArrayType *ATP = | 
 |       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(ATP, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the element type isn't canonical or has qualifiers, this won't | 
 |   // be a canonical type either, so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canon; | 
 |   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) { | 
 |     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split(); | 
 |     Canon = getConstantArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.first, 0), ArySize, | 
 |                                  ASM, IndexTypeQuals); | 
 |     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.second); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     ConstantArrayType *NewIP = | 
 |       ConstantArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   ConstantArrayType *New = new(*this,TypeAlignment) | 
 |     ConstantArrayType(EltTy, Canon, ArySize, ASM, IndexTypeQuals); | 
 |   ConstantArrayTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getVariableArrayDecayedType - Turns the given type, which may be | 
 | /// variably-modified, into the corresponding type with all the known | 
 | /// sizes replaced with [*]. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayDecayedType(QualType type) const { | 
 |   // Vastly most common case. | 
 |   if (!type->isVariablyModifiedType()) return type; | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType result; | 
 |  | 
 |   SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType(); | 
 |   const Type *ty = split.first; | 
 |   switch (ty->getTypeClass()) { | 
 | #define TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: | 
 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" | 
 |     llvm_unreachable("didn't desugar past all non-canonical types?"); | 
 |  | 
 |   // These types should never be variably-modified. | 
 |   case Type::Builtin: | 
 |   case Type::Complex: | 
 |   case Type::Vector: | 
 |   case Type::ExtVector: | 
 |   case Type::DependentSizedExtVector: | 
 |   case Type::ObjCObject: | 
 |   case Type::ObjCInterface: | 
 |   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: | 
 |   case Type::Record: | 
 |   case Type::Enum: | 
 |   case Type::UnresolvedUsing: | 
 |   case Type::TypeOfExpr: | 
 |   case Type::TypeOf: | 
 |   case Type::Decltype: | 
 |   case Type::DependentName: | 
 |   case Type::InjectedClassName: | 
 |   case Type::TemplateSpecialization: | 
 |   case Type::DependentTemplateSpecialization: | 
 |   case Type::TemplateTypeParm: | 
 |   case Type::SubstTemplateTypeParmPack: | 
 |   case Type::PackExpansion: | 
 |     llvm_unreachable("type should never be variably-modified"); | 
 |  | 
 |   // These types can be variably-modified but should never need to | 
 |   // further decay. | 
 |   case Type::FunctionNoProto: | 
 |   case Type::FunctionProto: | 
 |   case Type::BlockPointer: | 
 |   case Type::MemberPointer: | 
 |     return type; | 
 |  | 
 |   // These types can be variably-modified.  All these modifications | 
 |   // preserve structure except as noted by comments. | 
 |   // TODO: if we ever care about optimizing VLAs, there are no-op | 
 |   // optimizations available here. | 
 |   case Type::Pointer: | 
 |     result = getPointerType(getVariableArrayDecayedType( | 
 |                               cast<PointerType>(ty)->getPointeeType())); | 
 |     break; | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::LValueReference: { | 
 |     const LValueReferenceType *lv = cast<LValueReferenceType>(ty); | 
 |     result = getLValueReferenceType( | 
 |                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType()), | 
 |                                     lv->isSpelledAsLValue()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::RValueReference: { | 
 |     const RValueReferenceType *lv = cast<RValueReferenceType>(ty); | 
 |     result = getRValueReferenceType( | 
 |                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(lv->getPointeeType())); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::ConstantArray: { | 
 |     const ConstantArrayType *cat = cast<ConstantArrayType>(ty); | 
 |     result = getConstantArrayType( | 
 |                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(cat->getElementType()), | 
 |                                   cat->getSize(), | 
 |                                   cat->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                   cat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::DependentSizedArray: { | 
 |     const DependentSizedArrayType *dat = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ty); | 
 |     result = getDependentSizedArrayType( | 
 |                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(dat->getElementType()), | 
 |                                         dat->getSizeExpr(), | 
 |                                         dat->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                         dat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), | 
 |                                         dat->getBracketsRange()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Turn incomplete types into [*] types. | 
 |   case Type::IncompleteArray: { | 
 |     const IncompleteArrayType *iat = cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ty); | 
 |     result = getVariableArrayType( | 
 |                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(iat->getElementType()), | 
 |                                   /*size*/ 0, | 
 |                                   ArrayType::Normal, | 
 |                                   iat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), | 
 |                                   SourceRange()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Turn VLA types into [*] types. | 
 |   case Type::VariableArray: { | 
 |     const VariableArrayType *vat = cast<VariableArrayType>(ty); | 
 |     result = getVariableArrayType( | 
 |                  getVariableArrayDecayedType(vat->getElementType()), | 
 |                                   /*size*/ 0, | 
 |                                   ArrayType::Star, | 
 |                                   vat->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), | 
 |                                   vat->getBracketsRange()); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Apply the top-level qualifiers from the original. | 
 |   return getQualifiedType(result, split.second); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getVariableArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to the type for a | 
 | /// variable array of the specified element type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getVariableArrayType(QualType EltTy, | 
 |                                           Expr *NumElts, | 
 |                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, | 
 |                                           unsigned IndexTypeQuals, | 
 |                                           SourceRange Brackets) const { | 
 |   // Since we don't unique expressions, it isn't possible to unique VLA's | 
 |   // that have an expression provided for their size. | 
 |   QualType Canon; | 
 |    | 
 |   // Be sure to pull qualifiers off the element type. | 
 |   if (!EltTy.isCanonical() || EltTy.hasLocalQualifiers()) { | 
 |     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(EltTy).split(); | 
 |     Canon = getVariableArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.first, 0), NumElts, ASM, | 
 |                                  IndexTypeQuals, Brackets); | 
 |     Canon = getQualifiedType(Canon, canonSplit.second); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   VariableArrayType *New = new(*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |     VariableArrayType(EltTy, Canon, NumElts, ASM, IndexTypeQuals, Brackets); | 
 |  | 
 |   VariableArrayTypes.push_back(New); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getDependentSizedArrayType - Returns a non-unique reference to | 
 | /// the type for a dependently-sized array of the specified element | 
 | /// type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getDependentSizedArrayType(QualType elementType, | 
 |                                                 Expr *numElements, | 
 |                                                 ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, | 
 |                                                 unsigned elementTypeQuals, | 
 |                                                 SourceRange brackets) const { | 
 |   assert((!numElements || numElements->isTypeDependent() ||  | 
 |           numElements->isValueDependent()) && | 
 |          "Size must be type- or value-dependent!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Dependently-sized array types that do not have a specified number | 
 |   // of elements will have their sizes deduced from a dependent | 
 |   // initializer.  We do no canonicalization here at all, which is okay | 
 |   // because they can't be used in most locations. | 
 |   if (!numElements) { | 
 |     DependentSizedArrayType *newType | 
 |       = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |           DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, QualType(), | 
 |                                   numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals, | 
 |                                   brackets); | 
 |     Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |     return QualType(newType, 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, we actually build a new type every time, but we | 
 |   // also build a canonical type. | 
 |  | 
 |   SplitQualType canonElementType = getCanonicalType(elementType).split(); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *insertPos = 0; | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   DependentSizedArrayType::Profile(ID, *this, | 
 |                                    QualType(canonElementType.first, 0), | 
 |                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals, numElements); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Look for an existing type with these properties. | 
 |   DependentSizedArrayType *canonTy = | 
 |     DependentSizedArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we don't have one, build one. | 
 |   if (!canonTy) { | 
 |     canonTy = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |       DependentSizedArrayType(*this, QualType(canonElementType.first, 0), | 
 |                               QualType(), numElements, ASM, elementTypeQuals, | 
 |                               brackets); | 
 |     DependentSizedArrayTypes.InsertNode(canonTy, insertPos); | 
 |     Types.push_back(canonTy); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Apply qualifiers from the element type to the array. | 
 |   QualType canon = getQualifiedType(QualType(canonTy,0), | 
 |                                     canonElementType.second); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we didn't need extra canonicalization for the element type, | 
 |   // then just use that as our result. | 
 |   if (QualType(canonElementType.first, 0) == elementType) | 
 |     return canon; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, we need to build a type which follows the spelling | 
 |   // of the element type. | 
 |   DependentSizedArrayType *sugaredType | 
 |     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |         DependentSizedArrayType(*this, elementType, canon, numElements, | 
 |                                 ASM, elementTypeQuals, brackets); | 
 |   Types.push_back(sugaredType); | 
 |   return QualType(sugaredType, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getIncompleteArrayType(QualType elementType, | 
 |                                             ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier ASM, | 
 |                                             unsigned elementTypeQuals) const { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   IncompleteArrayType::Profile(ID, elementType, ASM, elementTypeQuals); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *insertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (IncompleteArrayType *iat = | 
 |        IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(iat, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type | 
 |   // either, so fill in the canonical type field.  We also have to pull | 
 |   // qualifiers off the element type. | 
 |   QualType canon; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (!elementType.isCanonical() || elementType.hasLocalQualifiers()) { | 
 |     SplitQualType canonSplit = getCanonicalType(elementType).split(); | 
 |     canon = getIncompleteArrayType(QualType(canonSplit.first, 0), | 
 |                                    ASM, elementTypeQuals); | 
 |     canon = getQualifiedType(canon, canonSplit.second); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     IncompleteArrayType *existing = | 
 |       IncompleteArrayTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, insertPos); | 
 |     assert(!existing && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void) existing; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   IncompleteArrayType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |     IncompleteArrayType(elementType, canon, ASM, elementTypeQuals); | 
 |  | 
 |   IncompleteArrayTypes.InsertNode(newType, insertPos); | 
 |   Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |   return QualType(newType, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getVectorType - Return the unique reference to a vector type of | 
 | /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts, | 
 |                                    VectorType::VectorKind VecKind) const { | 
 |   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType()); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::Vector, VecKind); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(VTP, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, | 
 |   // so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts, VecKind); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |   VectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |     VectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical, VecKind); | 
 |   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getExtVectorType - Return the unique reference to an extended vector type of | 
 | /// the specified element type and size. VectorType must be a built-in type. | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getExtVectorType(QualType vecType, unsigned NumElts) const { | 
 |   assert(vecType->isBuiltinType()); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Check if we've already instantiated a vector of this type. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   VectorType::Profile(ID, vecType, NumElts, Type::ExtVector, | 
 |                       VectorType::GenericVector); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (VectorType *VTP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(VTP, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the element type isn't canonical, this won't be a canonical type either, | 
 |   // so fill in the canonical type field. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!vecType.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getExtVectorType(getCanonicalType(vecType), NumElts); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     VectorType *NewIP = VectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |   ExtVectorType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |     ExtVectorType(vecType, NumElts, Canonical); | 
 |   VectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getDependentSizedExtVectorType(QualType vecType, | 
 |                                            Expr *SizeExpr, | 
 |                                            SourceLocation AttrLoc) const { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   DependentSizedExtVectorType::Profile(ID, *this, getCanonicalType(vecType), | 
 |                                        SizeExpr); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   DependentSizedExtVectorType *Canon | 
 |     = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   DependentSizedExtVectorType *New; | 
 |   if (Canon) { | 
 |     // We already have a canonical version of this array type; use it as | 
 |     // the canonical type for a newly-built type. | 
 |     New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |       DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(Canon, 0), | 
 |                                   SizeExpr, AttrLoc); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     QualType CanonVecTy = getCanonicalType(vecType); | 
 |     if (CanonVecTy == vecType) { | 
 |       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, QualType(), SizeExpr, | 
 |                                     AttrLoc); | 
 |  | 
 |       DependentSizedExtVectorType *CanonCheck | 
 |         = DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |       assert(!CanonCheck && "Dependent-sized ext_vector canonical type broken"); | 
 |       (void)CanonCheck; | 
 |       DependentSizedExtVectorTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       QualType Canon = getDependentSizedExtVectorType(CanonVecTy, SizeExpr, | 
 |                                                       SourceLocation()); | 
 |       New = new (*this, TypeAlignment)  | 
 |         DependentSizedExtVectorType(*this, vecType, Canon, SizeExpr, AttrLoc); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFunctionNoProtoType - Return a K&R style C function type like 'int()'. | 
 | /// | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getFunctionNoProtoType(QualType ResultTy, | 
 |                                    const FunctionType::ExtInfo &Info) const { | 
 |   const CallingConv CallConv = Info.getCC(); | 
 |   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   FunctionNoProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, Info); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (FunctionNoProtoType *FT = | 
 |         FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(FT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!ResultTy.isCanonical() || | 
 |       getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) { | 
 |     Canonical = | 
 |       getFunctionNoProtoType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy), | 
 |                      Info.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv))); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     FunctionNoProtoType *NewIP = | 
 |       FunctionNoProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   FunctionNoProtoType *New = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |     FunctionNoProtoType(ResultTy, Canonical, Info); | 
 |   Types.push_back(New); | 
 |   FunctionNoProtoTypes.InsertNode(New, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(New, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFunctionType - Return a normal function type with a typed argument | 
 | /// list.  isVariadic indicates whether the argument list includes '...'. | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getFunctionType(QualType ResultTy, | 
 |                             const QualType *ArgArray, unsigned NumArgs, | 
 |                             const FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo &EPI) const { | 
 |   // Unique functions, to guarantee there is only one function of a particular | 
 |   // structure. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   FunctionProtoType::Profile(ID, ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, EPI); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (FunctionProtoType *FTP = | 
 |         FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(FTP, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Determine whether the type being created is already canonical or not. | 
 |   bool isCanonical = !EPI.HasExceptionSpec && ResultTy.isCanonical(); | 
 |   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs && isCanonical; ++i) | 
 |     if (!ArgArray[i].isCanonicalAsParam()) | 
 |       isCanonical = false; | 
 |  | 
 |   const CallingConv CallConv = EPI.ExtInfo.getCC(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If this type isn't canonical, get the canonical version of it. | 
 |   // The exception spec is not part of the canonical type. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!isCanonical || getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv) != CallConv) { | 
 |     llvm::SmallVector<QualType, 16> CanonicalArgs; | 
 |     CanonicalArgs.reserve(NumArgs); | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i) | 
 |       CanonicalArgs.push_back(getCanonicalParamType(ArgArray[i])); | 
 |  | 
 |     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo CanonicalEPI = EPI; | 
 |     if (CanonicalEPI.HasExceptionSpec) { | 
 |       CanonicalEPI.HasExceptionSpec = false; | 
 |       CanonicalEPI.HasAnyExceptionSpec = false; | 
 |       CanonicalEPI.NumExceptions = 0; | 
 |     } | 
 |     CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo | 
 |       = CanonicalEPI.ExtInfo.withCallingConv(getCanonicalCallConv(CallConv)); | 
 |  | 
 |     Canonical = getFunctionType(getCanonicalType(ResultTy), | 
 |                                 CanonicalArgs.data(), NumArgs, | 
 |                                 CanonicalEPI); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Get the new insert position for the node we care about. | 
 |     FunctionProtoType *NewIP = | 
 |       FunctionProtoTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(NewIP == 0 && "Shouldn't be in the map!"); (void)NewIP; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // FunctionProtoType objects are allocated with extra bytes after them | 
 |   // for two variable size arrays (for parameter and exception types) at the | 
 |   // end of them. | 
 |   size_t Size = sizeof(FunctionProtoType) + | 
 |                 NumArgs * sizeof(QualType) + | 
 |                 EPI.NumExceptions * sizeof(QualType); | 
 |   FunctionProtoType *FTP = (FunctionProtoType*) Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment); | 
 |   new (FTP) FunctionProtoType(ResultTy, ArgArray, NumArgs, Canonical, EPI); | 
 |   Types.push_back(FTP); | 
 |   FunctionProtoTypes.InsertNode(FTP, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(FTP, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | #ifndef NDEBUG | 
 | static bool NeedsInjectedClassNameType(const RecordDecl *D) { | 
 |   if (!isa<CXXRecordDecl>(D)) return false; | 
 |   const CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(D); | 
 |   if (isa<ClassTemplatePartialSpecializationDecl>(RD)) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   if (RD->getDescribedClassTemplate() && | 
 |       !isa<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RD)) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 | #endif | 
 |  | 
 | /// getInjectedClassNameType - Return the unique reference to the | 
 | /// injected class name type for the specified templated declaration. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getInjectedClassNameType(CXXRecordDecl *Decl, | 
 |                                               QualType TST) const { | 
 |   assert(NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Decl)); | 
 |   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) { | 
 |     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl)); | 
 |   } else if (CXXRecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDeclaration()) { | 
 |     assert(PrevDecl->TypeForDecl && "previous declaration has no type"); | 
 |     Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl; | 
 |     assert(isa<InjectedClassNameType>(Decl->TypeForDecl)); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     Type *newType = | 
 |       new (*this, TypeAlignment) InjectedClassNameType(Decl, TST); | 
 |     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; | 
 |     Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |   } | 
 |   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypeDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the | 
 | /// specified type declaration. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getTypeDeclTypeSlow(const TypeDecl *Decl) const { | 
 |   assert(Decl && "Passed null for Decl param"); | 
 |   assert(!Decl->TypeForDecl && "TypeForDecl present in slow case"); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const TypedefDecl *Typedef = dyn_cast<TypedefDecl>(Decl)) | 
 |     return getTypedefType(Typedef); | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(!isa<TemplateTypeParmDecl>(Decl) && | 
 |          "Template type parameter types are always available."); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const RecordDecl *Record = dyn_cast<RecordDecl>(Decl)) { | 
 |     assert(!Record->getPreviousDeclaration() && | 
 |            "struct/union has previous declaration"); | 
 |     assert(!NeedsInjectedClassNameType(Record)); | 
 |     return getRecordType(Record); | 
 |   } else if (const EnumDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumDecl>(Decl)) { | 
 |     assert(!Enum->getPreviousDeclaration() && | 
 |            "enum has previous declaration"); | 
 |     return getEnumType(Enum); | 
 |   } else if (const UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl *Using = | 
 |                dyn_cast<UnresolvedUsingTypenameDecl>(Decl)) { | 
 |     Type *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) UnresolvedUsingType(Using); | 
 |     Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; | 
 |     Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |   } else | 
 |     llvm_unreachable("TypeDecl without a type?"); | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypedefType - Return the unique reference to the type for the | 
 | /// specified typename decl. | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getTypedefType(const TypedefDecl *Decl, QualType Canonical) const { | 
 |   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (Canonical.isNull()) | 
 |     Canonical = getCanonicalType(Decl->getUnderlyingType()); | 
 |   TypedefType *newType = new(*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |     TypedefType(Type::Typedef, Decl, Canonical); | 
 |   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; | 
 |   Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |   return QualType(newType, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getRecordType(const RecordDecl *Decl) const { | 
 |   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const RecordDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDeclaration()) | 
 |     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl) | 
 |       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);  | 
 |  | 
 |   RecordType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) RecordType(Decl); | 
 |   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; | 
 |   Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |   return QualType(newType, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getEnumType(const EnumDecl *Decl) const { | 
 |   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const EnumDecl *PrevDecl = Decl->getPreviousDeclaration()) | 
 |     if (PrevDecl->TypeForDecl) | 
 |       return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl = PrevDecl->TypeForDecl, 0);  | 
 |  | 
 |   EnumType *newType = new (*this, TypeAlignment) EnumType(Decl); | 
 |   Decl->TypeForDecl = newType; | 
 |   Types.push_back(newType); | 
 |   return QualType(newType, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getAttributedType(AttributedType::Kind attrKind, | 
 |                                        QualType modifiedType, | 
 |                                        QualType equivalentType) { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID id; | 
 |   AttributedType::Profile(id, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *insertPos = 0; | 
 |   AttributedType *type = AttributedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(id, insertPos); | 
 |   if (type) return QualType(type, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType canon = getCanonicalType(equivalentType); | 
 |   type = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |            AttributedType(canon, attrKind, modifiedType, equivalentType); | 
 |  | 
 |   Types.push_back(type); | 
 |   AttributedTypes.InsertNode(type, insertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(type, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve a substitution-result type. | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmType(const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm, | 
 |                                          QualType Replacement) const { | 
 |   assert(Replacement.isCanonical() | 
 |          && "replacement types must always be canonical"); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   SubstTemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Parm, Replacement); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   SubstTemplateTypeParmType *SubstParm | 
 |     = SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (!SubstParm) { | 
 |     SubstParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |       SubstTemplateTypeParmType(Parm, Replacement); | 
 |     Types.push_back(SubstParm); | 
 |     SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(SubstParm, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve a  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType( | 
 |                                           const TemplateTypeParmType *Parm, | 
 |                                               const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) { | 
 | #ifndef NDEBUG | 
 |   for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator P = ArgPack.pack_begin(),  | 
 |                                     PEnd = ArgPack.pack_end(); | 
 |        P != PEnd; ++P) { | 
 |     assert(P->getKind() == TemplateArgument::Type &&"Pack contains a non-type"); | 
 |     assert(P->getAsType().isCanonical() && "Pack contains non-canonical type"); | 
 |   } | 
 | #endif | 
 |    | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType::Profile(ID, Parm, ArgPack); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm | 
 |         = SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(SubstParm, 0); | 
 |    | 
 |   QualType Canon; | 
 |   if (!Parm->isCanonicalUnqualified()) { | 
 |     Canon = getCanonicalType(QualType(Parm, 0)); | 
 |     Canon = getSubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(cast<TemplateTypeParmType>(Canon), | 
 |                                              ArgPack); | 
 |     SubstTemplateTypeParmPackTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType *SubstParm | 
 |     = new (*this, TypeAlignment) SubstTemplateTypeParmPackType(Parm, Canon, | 
 |                                                                ArgPack); | 
 |   Types.push_back(SubstParm); | 
 |   SubstTemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(SubstParm, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(SubstParm, 0);   | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve the template type parameter type for a template | 
 | /// parameter or parameter pack with the given depth, index, and (optionally) | 
 | /// name. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getTemplateTypeParmType(unsigned Depth, unsigned Index, | 
 |                                              bool ParameterPack, | 
 |                                              IdentifierInfo *Name) const { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   TemplateTypeParmType::Profile(ID, Depth, Index, ParameterPack, Name); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   TemplateTypeParmType *TypeParm | 
 |     = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (TypeParm) | 
 |     return QualType(TypeParm, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (Name) { | 
 |     QualType Canon = getTemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack); | 
 |     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack, Name, Canon); | 
 |  | 
 |     TemplateTypeParmType *TypeCheck  | 
 |       = TemplateTypeParmTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(!TypeCheck && "Template type parameter canonical type broken"); | 
 |     (void)TypeCheck; | 
 |   } else | 
 |     TypeParm = new (*this, TypeAlignment) | 
 |       TemplateTypeParmType(Depth, Index, ParameterPack); | 
 |  | 
 |   Types.push_back(TypeParm); | 
 |   TemplateTypeParmTypes.InsertNode(TypeParm, InsertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(TypeParm, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | TypeSourceInfo * | 
 | ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationTypeInfo(TemplateName Name, | 
 |                                               SourceLocation NameLoc, | 
 |                                         const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args, | 
 |                                               QualType CanonType) const { | 
 |   QualType TST = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name, Args, CanonType); | 
 |  | 
 |   TypeSourceInfo *DI = CreateTypeSourceInfo(TST); | 
 |   TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc TL | 
 |     = cast<TemplateSpecializationTypeLoc>(DI->getTypeLoc()); | 
 |   TL.setTemplateNameLoc(NameLoc); | 
 |   TL.setLAngleLoc(Args.getLAngleLoc()); | 
 |   TL.setRAngleLoc(Args.getRAngleLoc()); | 
 |   for (unsigned i = 0, e = TL.getNumArgs(); i != e; ++i) | 
 |     TL.setArgLocInfo(i, Args[i].getLocInfo()); | 
 |   return DI; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, | 
 |                                           const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args, | 
 |                                           QualType Canon) const { | 
 |   unsigned NumArgs = Args.size(); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> ArgVec; | 
 |   ArgVec.reserve(NumArgs); | 
 |   for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; ++i) | 
 |     ArgVec.push_back(Args[i].getArgument()); | 
 |  | 
 |   return getTemplateSpecializationType(Template, ArgVec.data(), NumArgs, | 
 |                                        Canon); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, | 
 |                                           const TemplateArgument *Args, | 
 |                                           unsigned NumArgs, | 
 |                                           QualType Canon) const { | 
 |   if (!Canon.isNull()) | 
 |     Canon = getCanonicalType(Canon); | 
 |   else | 
 |     Canon = getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(Template, Args, NumArgs); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Allocate the (non-canonical) template specialization type, but don't | 
 |   // try to unique it: these types typically have location information that | 
 |   // we don't unique and don't want to lose. | 
 |   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) + | 
 |                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs), | 
 |                        TypeAlignment); | 
 |   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec | 
 |     = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(Template, | 
 |                                            Args, NumArgs, | 
 |                                            Canon); | 
 |  | 
 |   Types.push_back(Spec); | 
 |   return QualType(Spec, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateSpecializationType(TemplateName Template, | 
 |                                                    const TemplateArgument *Args, | 
 |                                                    unsigned NumArgs) const { | 
 |   // Build the canonical template specialization type. | 
 |   TemplateName CanonTemplate = getCanonicalTemplateName(Template); | 
 |   llvm::SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 4> CanonArgs; | 
 |   CanonArgs.reserve(NumArgs); | 
 |   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) | 
 |     CanonArgs.push_back(getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I])); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Determine whether this canonical template specialization type already | 
 |   // exists. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   TemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, CanonTemplate, | 
 |                                       CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, *this); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   TemplateSpecializationType *Spec | 
 |     = TemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (!Spec) { | 
 |     // Allocate a new canonical template specialization type. | 
 |     void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(TemplateSpecializationType) + | 
 |                           sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs), | 
 |                          TypeAlignment); | 
 |     Spec = new (Mem) TemplateSpecializationType(CanonTemplate, | 
 |                                                 CanonArgs.data(), NumArgs, | 
 |                                                 QualType()); | 
 |     Types.push_back(Spec); | 
 |     TemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(Spec, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(Spec->isDependentType() && | 
 |          "Non-dependent template-id type must have a canonical type"); | 
 |   return QualType(Spec, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getElaboratedType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, | 
 |                               NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                               QualType NamedType) const { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ElaboratedType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, NamedType); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   ElaboratedType *T = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (T) | 
 |     return QualType(T, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Canon = NamedType; | 
 |   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canon = getCanonicalType(NamedType); | 
 |     ElaboratedType *CheckT = ElaboratedTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(!CheckT && "Elaborated canonical type broken"); | 
 |     (void)CheckT; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T = new (*this) ElaboratedType(Keyword, NNS, NamedType, Canon); | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   ElaboratedTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getParenType(QualType InnerType) const { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ParenType::Profile(ID, InnerType); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   ParenType *T = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (T) | 
 |     return QualType(T, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Canon = InnerType; | 
 |   if (!Canon.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canon = getCanonicalType(InnerType); | 
 |     ParenType *CheckT = ParenTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(!CheckT && "Paren canonical type broken"); | 
 |     (void)CheckT; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T = new (*this) ParenType(InnerType, Canon); | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   ParenTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getDependentNameType(ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, | 
 |                                           NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                                           const IdentifierInfo *Name, | 
 |                                           QualType Canon) const { | 
 |   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent"); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (Canon.isNull()) { | 
 |     NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); | 
 |     ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword; | 
 |     if (Keyword == ETK_None) | 
 |       CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename; | 
 |      | 
 |     if (CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) | 
 |       Canon = getDependentNameType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, Name); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   DependentNameType::Profile(ID, Keyword, NNS, Name); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   DependentNameType *T | 
 |     = DependentNameTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (T) | 
 |     return QualType(T, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   T = new (*this) DependentNameType(Keyword, NNS, Name, Canon); | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   DependentNameTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType( | 
 |                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, | 
 |                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name, | 
 |                                  const TemplateArgumentListInfo &Args) const { | 
 |   // TODO: avoid this copy | 
 |   llvm::SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> ArgCopy; | 
 |   for (unsigned I = 0, E = Args.size(); I != E; ++I) | 
 |     ArgCopy.push_back(Args[I].getArgument()); | 
 |   return getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, Name, | 
 |                                                 ArgCopy.size(), | 
 |                                                 ArgCopy.data()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::getDependentTemplateSpecializationType( | 
 |                                  ElaboratedTypeKeyword Keyword, | 
 |                                  NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                                  const IdentifierInfo *Name, | 
 |                                  unsigned NumArgs, | 
 |                                  const TemplateArgument *Args) const { | 
 |   assert(NNS->isDependent() && "nested-name-specifier must be dependent"); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   DependentTemplateSpecializationType::Profile(ID, *this, Keyword, NNS, | 
 |                                                Name, NumArgs, Args); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   DependentTemplateSpecializationType *T | 
 |     = DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (T) | 
 |     return QualType(T, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); | 
 |  | 
 |   ElaboratedTypeKeyword CanonKeyword = Keyword; | 
 |   if (Keyword == ETK_None) CanonKeyword = ETK_Typename; | 
 |  | 
 |   bool AnyNonCanonArgs = false; | 
 |   llvm::SmallVector<TemplateArgument, 16> CanonArgs(NumArgs); | 
 |   for (unsigned I = 0; I != NumArgs; ++I) { | 
 |     CanonArgs[I] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(Args[I]); | 
 |     if (!CanonArgs[I].structurallyEquals(Args[I])) | 
 |       AnyNonCanonArgs = true; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Canon; | 
 |   if (AnyNonCanonArgs || CanonNNS != NNS || CanonKeyword != Keyword) { | 
 |     Canon = getDependentTemplateSpecializationType(CanonKeyword, CanonNNS, | 
 |                                                    Name, NumArgs, | 
 |                                                    CanonArgs.data()); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Find the insert position again. | 
 |     DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   void *Mem = Allocate((sizeof(DependentTemplateSpecializationType) + | 
 |                         sizeof(TemplateArgument) * NumArgs), | 
 |                        TypeAlignment); | 
 |   T = new (Mem) DependentTemplateSpecializationType(Keyword, NNS, | 
 |                                                     Name, NumArgs, Args, Canon); | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   DependentTemplateSpecializationTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getPackExpansionType(QualType Pattern, | 
 |                                       llvm::Optional<unsigned> NumExpansions) { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   PackExpansionType::Profile(ID, Pattern, NumExpansions); | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(Pattern->containsUnexpandedParameterPack() && | 
 |          "Pack expansions must expand one or more parameter packs"); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   PackExpansionType *T | 
 |     = PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (T) | 
 |     return QualType(T, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Canon; | 
 |   if (!Pattern.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canon = getPackExpansionType(getCanonicalType(Pattern), NumExpansions); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Find the insert position again. | 
 |     PackExpansionTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T = new (*this) PackExpansionType(Pattern, Canon, NumExpansions); | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   PackExpansionTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0);   | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// CmpProtocolNames - Comparison predicate for sorting protocols | 
 | /// alphabetically. | 
 | static bool CmpProtocolNames(const ObjCProtocolDecl *LHS, | 
 |                             const ObjCProtocolDecl *RHS) { | 
 |   return LHS->getDeclName() < RHS->getDeclName(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | static bool areSortedAndUniqued(ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols, | 
 |                                 unsigned NumProtocols) { | 
 |   if (NumProtocols == 0) return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   for (unsigned i = 1; i != NumProtocols; ++i) | 
 |     if (!CmpProtocolNames(Protocols[i-1], Protocols[i])) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |   return true; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | static void SortAndUniqueProtocols(ObjCProtocolDecl **Protocols, | 
 |                                    unsigned &NumProtocols) { | 
 |   ObjCProtocolDecl **ProtocolsEnd = Protocols+NumProtocols; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Sort protocols, keyed by name. | 
 |   std::sort(Protocols, Protocols+NumProtocols, CmpProtocolNames); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Remove duplicates. | 
 |   ProtocolsEnd = std::unique(Protocols, ProtocolsEnd); | 
 |   NumProtocols = ProtocolsEnd-Protocols; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectType(QualType BaseType, | 
 |                                        ObjCProtocolDecl * const *Protocols, | 
 |                                        unsigned NumProtocols) const { | 
 |   // If the base type is an interface and there aren't any protocols | 
 |   // to add, then the interface type will do just fine. | 
 |   if (!NumProtocols && isa<ObjCInterfaceType>(BaseType)) | 
 |     return BaseType; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Look in the folding set for an existing type. | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ObjCObjectTypeImpl::Profile(ID, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols); | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (ObjCObjectType *QT = ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(QT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Build the canonical type, which has the canonical base type and | 
 |   // a sorted-and-uniqued list of protocols. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   bool ProtocolsSorted = areSortedAndUniqued(Protocols, NumProtocols); | 
 |   if (!ProtocolsSorted || !BaseType.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     if (!ProtocolsSorted) { | 
 |       llvm::SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl*, 8> Sorted(Protocols, | 
 |                                                      Protocols + NumProtocols); | 
 |       unsigned UniqueCount = NumProtocols; | 
 |  | 
 |       SortAndUniqueProtocols(&Sorted[0], UniqueCount); | 
 |       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType), | 
 |                                     &Sorted[0], UniqueCount); | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       Canonical = getObjCObjectType(getCanonicalType(BaseType), | 
 |                                     Protocols, NumProtocols); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     // Regenerate InsertPos. | 
 |     ObjCObjectTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   unsigned Size = sizeof(ObjCObjectTypeImpl); | 
 |   Size += NumProtocols * sizeof(ObjCProtocolDecl *); | 
 |   void *Mem = Allocate(Size, TypeAlignment); | 
 |   ObjCObjectTypeImpl *T = | 
 |     new (Mem) ObjCObjectTypeImpl(Canonical, BaseType, Protocols, NumProtocols); | 
 |  | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   ObjCObjectTypes.InsertNode(T, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCObjectPointerType - Return a ObjCObjectPointerType type for | 
 | /// the given object type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getObjCObjectPointerType(QualType ObjectT) const { | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   ObjCObjectPointerType::Profile(ID, ObjectT); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   if (ObjCObjectPointerType *QT = | 
 |               ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos)) | 
 |     return QualType(QT, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Find the canonical object type. | 
 |   QualType Canonical; | 
 |   if (!ObjectT.isCanonical()) { | 
 |     Canonical = getObjCObjectPointerType(getCanonicalType(ObjectT)); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Regenerate InsertPos. | 
 |     ObjCObjectPointerTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // No match. | 
 |   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCObjectPointerType), TypeAlignment); | 
 |   ObjCObjectPointerType *QType = | 
 |     new (Mem) ObjCObjectPointerType(Canonical, ObjectT); | 
 |  | 
 |   Types.push_back(QType); | 
 |   ObjCObjectPointerTypes.InsertNode(QType, InsertPos); | 
 |   return QualType(QType, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCInterfaceType - Return the unique reference to the type for the | 
 | /// specified ObjC interface decl. The list of protocols is optional. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getObjCInterfaceType(const ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) const { | 
 |   if (Decl->TypeForDecl) | 
 |     return QualType(Decl->TypeForDecl, 0); | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: redeclarations? | 
 |   void *Mem = Allocate(sizeof(ObjCInterfaceType), TypeAlignment); | 
 |   ObjCInterfaceType *T = new (Mem) ObjCInterfaceType(Decl); | 
 |   Decl->TypeForDecl = T; | 
 |   Types.push_back(T); | 
 |   return QualType(T, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypeOfExprType - Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we can't unique | 
 | /// TypeOfExprType AST's (since expression's are never shared). For example, | 
 | /// multiple declarations that refer to "typeof(x)" all contain different | 
 | /// DeclRefExpr's. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates | 
 | /// on canonical type's (which are always unique). | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfExprType(Expr *tofExpr) const { | 
 |   TypeOfExprType *toe; | 
 |   if (tofExpr->isTypeDependent()) { | 
 |     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |     DependentTypeOfExprType::Profile(ID, *this, tofExpr); | 
 |  | 
 |     void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |     DependentTypeOfExprType *Canon | 
 |       = DependentTypeOfExprTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     if (Canon) { | 
 |       // We already have a "canonical" version of an identical, dependent | 
 |       // typeof(expr) type. Use that as our canonical type. | 
 |       toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, | 
 |                                           QualType((TypeOfExprType*)Canon, 0)); | 
 |     } | 
 |     else { | 
 |       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type. | 
 |       Canon | 
 |         = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentTypeOfExprType(*this, tofExpr); | 
 |       DependentTypeOfExprTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos); | 
 |       toe = Canon; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofExpr->getType()); | 
 |     toe = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfExprType(tofExpr, Canonical); | 
 |   } | 
 |   Types.push_back(toe); | 
 |   return QualType(toe, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTypeOfType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique | 
 | /// TypeOfType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be | 
 | /// memory savings. Since typeof(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be | 
 | /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates | 
 | /// on canonical type's (which are always unique). | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getTypeOfType(QualType tofType) const { | 
 |   QualType Canonical = getCanonicalType(tofType); | 
 |   TypeOfType *tot = new (*this, TypeAlignment) TypeOfType(tofType, Canonical); | 
 |   Types.push_back(tot); | 
 |   return QualType(tot, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getDecltypeForExpr - Given an expr, will return the decltype for that | 
 | /// expression, according to the rules in C++0x [dcl.type.simple]p4 | 
 | static QualType getDecltypeForExpr(const Expr *e, const ASTContext &Context) { | 
 |   if (e->isTypeDependent()) | 
 |     return Context.DependentTy; | 
 |  | 
 |   // If e is an id expression or a class member access, decltype(e) is defined | 
 |   // as the type of the entity named by e. | 
 |   if (const DeclRefExpr *DRE = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(e)) { | 
 |     if (const ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(DRE->getDecl())) | 
 |       return VD->getType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |   if (const MemberExpr *ME = dyn_cast<MemberExpr>(e)) { | 
 |     if (const FieldDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(ME->getMemberDecl())) | 
 |       return FD->getType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |   // If e is a function call or an invocation of an overloaded operator, | 
 |   // (parentheses around e are ignored), decltype(e) is defined as the | 
 |   // return type of that function. | 
 |   if (const CallExpr *CE = dyn_cast<CallExpr>(e->IgnoreParens())) | 
 |     return CE->getCallReturnType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType T = e->getType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, where T is the type of e, if e is an lvalue, decltype(e) is | 
 |   // defined as T&, otherwise decltype(e) is defined as T. | 
 |   if (e->isLValue()) | 
 |     T = Context.getLValueReferenceType(T); | 
 |  | 
 |   return T; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getDecltypeType -  Unlike many "get<Type>" functions, we don't unique | 
 | /// DecltypeType AST's. The only motivation to unique these nodes would be | 
 | /// memory savings. Since decltype(t) is fairly uncommon, space shouldn't be | 
 | /// an issue. This doesn't effect the type checker, since it operates | 
 | /// on canonical type's (which are always unique). | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getDecltypeType(Expr *e) const { | 
 |   DecltypeType *dt; | 
 |   if (e->isTypeDependent()) { | 
 |     llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |     DependentDecltypeType::Profile(ID, *this, e); | 
 |  | 
 |     void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |     DependentDecltypeType *Canon | 
 |       = DependentDecltypeTypes.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     if (Canon) { | 
 |       // We already have a "canonical" version of an equivalent, dependent | 
 |       // decltype type. Use that as our canonical type. | 
 |       dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, DependentTy, | 
 |                                        QualType((DecltypeType*)Canon, 0)); | 
 |     } | 
 |     else { | 
 |       // Build a new, canonical typeof(expr) type. | 
 |       Canon = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DependentDecltypeType(*this, e); | 
 |       DependentDecltypeTypes.InsertNode(Canon, InsertPos); | 
 |       dt = Canon; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     QualType T = getDecltypeForExpr(e, *this); | 
 |     dt = new (*this, TypeAlignment) DecltypeType(e, T, getCanonicalType(T)); | 
 |   } | 
 |   Types.push_back(dt); | 
 |   return QualType(dt, 0); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getTagDeclType - Return the unique reference to the type for the | 
 | /// specified TagDecl (struct/union/class/enum) decl. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getTagDeclType(const TagDecl *Decl) const { | 
 |   assert (Decl); | 
 |   // FIXME: What is the design on getTagDeclType when it requires casting | 
 |   // away const?  mutable? | 
 |   return getTypeDeclType(const_cast<TagDecl*>(Decl)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getSizeType - Return the unique type for "size_t" (C99 7.17), the result | 
 | /// of the sizeof operator (C99 6.5.3.4p4). The value is target dependent and | 
 | /// needs to agree with the definition in <stddef.h>. | 
 | CanQualType ASTContext::getSizeType() const { | 
 |   return getFromTargetType(Target.getSizeType()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getSignedWCharType - Return the type of "signed wchar_t". | 
 | /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getSignedWCharType() const { | 
 |   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ? | 
 |   return WCharTy; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getUnsignedWCharType - Return the type of "unsigned wchar_t". | 
 | /// Used when in C++, as a GCC extension. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getUnsignedWCharType() const { | 
 |   // FIXME: derive from "Target" ? | 
 |   return UnsignedIntTy; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getPointerDiffType - Return the unique type for "ptrdiff_t" (ref?) | 
 | /// defined in <stddef.h>. Pointer - pointer requires this (C99 6.5.6p9). | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getPointerDiffType() const { | 
 |   return getFromTargetType(Target.getPtrDiffType(0)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                              Type Operators | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | CanQualType ASTContext::getCanonicalParamType(QualType T) const { | 
 |   // Push qualifiers into arrays, and then discard any remaining | 
 |   // qualifiers. | 
 |   T = getCanonicalType(T); | 
 |   T = getVariableArrayDecayedType(T); | 
 |   const Type *Ty = T.getTypePtr(); | 
 |   QualType Result; | 
 |   if (isa<ArrayType>(Ty)) { | 
 |     Result = getArrayDecayedType(QualType(Ty,0)); | 
 |   } else if (isa<FunctionType>(Ty)) { | 
 |     Result = getPointerType(QualType(Ty, 0)); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     Result = QualType(Ty, 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return CanQualType::CreateUnsafe(Result); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getUnqualifiedArrayType(QualType type, | 
 |                                              Qualifiers &quals) { | 
 |   SplitQualType splitType = type.getSplitUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: getSplitUnqualifiedType() actually walks all the way to | 
 |   // the unqualified desugared type and then drops it on the floor. | 
 |   // We then have to strip that sugar back off with | 
 |   // getUnqualifiedDesugaredType(), which is silly. | 
 |   const ArrayType *AT = | 
 |     dyn_cast<ArrayType>(splitType.first->getUnqualifiedDesugaredType()); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we don't have an array, just use the results in splitType. | 
 |   if (!AT) { | 
 |     quals = splitType.second; | 
 |     return QualType(splitType.first, 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, recurse on the array's element type. | 
 |   QualType elementType = AT->getElementType(); | 
 |   QualType unqualElementType = getUnqualifiedArrayType(elementType, quals); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If that didn't change the element type, AT has no qualifiers, so we | 
 |   // can just use the results in splitType. | 
 |   if (elementType == unqualElementType) { | 
 |     assert(quals.empty()); // from the recursive call | 
 |     quals = splitType.second; | 
 |     return QualType(splitType.first, 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, add in the qualifiers from the outermost type, then | 
 |   // build the type back up. | 
 |   quals.addConsistentQualifiers(splitType.second); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) { | 
 |     return getConstantArrayType(unqualElementType, CAT->getSize(), | 
 |                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) { | 
 |     return getIncompleteArrayType(unqualElementType, IAT->getSizeModifier(), 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const VariableArrayType *VAT = dyn_cast<VariableArrayType>(AT)) { | 
 |     return getVariableArrayType(unqualElementType, | 
 |                                 VAT->getSizeExpr(), | 
 |                                 VAT->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                 VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), | 
 |                                 VAT->getBracketsRange()); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT = cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(AT); | 
 |   return getDependentSizedArrayType(unqualElementType, DSAT->getSizeExpr(), | 
 |                                     DSAT->getSizeModifier(), 0, | 
 |                                     SourceRange()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes - If T1 and T2 are pointer types  that | 
 | /// may be similar (C++ 4.4), replaces T1 and T2 with the type that | 
 | /// they point to and return true. If T1 and T2 aren't pointer types | 
 | /// or pointer-to-member types, or if they are not similar at this | 
 | /// level, returns false and leaves T1 and T2 unchanged. Top-level | 
 | /// qualifiers on T1 and T2 are ignored. This function will typically | 
 | /// be called in a loop that successively "unwraps" pointer and | 
 | /// pointer-to-member types to compare them at each level. | 
 | bool ASTContext::UnwrapSimilarPointerTypes(QualType &T1, QualType &T2) { | 
 |   const PointerType *T1PtrType = T1->getAs<PointerType>(), | 
 |                     *T2PtrType = T2->getAs<PointerType>(); | 
 |   if (T1PtrType && T2PtrType) { | 
 |     T1 = T1PtrType->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     T2 = T2PtrType->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   const MemberPointerType *T1MPType = T1->getAs<MemberPointerType>(), | 
 |                           *T2MPType = T2->getAs<MemberPointerType>(); | 
 |   if (T1MPType && T2MPType &&  | 
 |       hasSameUnqualifiedType(QualType(T1MPType->getClass(), 0),  | 
 |                              QualType(T2MPType->getClass(), 0))) { | 
 |     T1 = T1MPType->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     T2 = T2MPType->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   if (getLangOptions().ObjC1) { | 
 |     const ObjCObjectPointerType *T1OPType = T1->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), | 
 |                                 *T2OPType = T2->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | 
 |     if (T1OPType && T2OPType) { | 
 |       T1 = T1OPType->getPointeeType(); | 
 |       T2 = T2OPType->getPointeeType(); | 
 |       return true; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   // FIXME: Block pointers, too? | 
 |    | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | DeclarationNameInfo | 
 | ASTContext::getNameForTemplate(TemplateName Name, | 
 |                                SourceLocation NameLoc) const { | 
 |   if (TemplateDecl *TD = Name.getAsTemplateDecl()) | 
 |     // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc? | 
 |     return DeclarationNameInfo(TD->getDeclName(), NameLoc); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName()) { | 
 |     DeclarationName DName; | 
 |     if (DTN->isIdentifier()) { | 
 |       DName = DeclarationNames.getIdentifier(DTN->getIdentifier()); | 
 |       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc); | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       DName = DeclarationNames.getCXXOperatorName(DTN->getOperator()); | 
 |       // DNInfo work in progress: FIXME: source locations? | 
 |       DeclarationNameLoc DNLoc; | 
 |       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.BeginOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding(); | 
 |       DNLoc.CXXOperatorName.EndOpNameLoc = SourceLocation().getRawEncoding(); | 
 |       return DeclarationNameInfo(DName, NameLoc, DNLoc); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   OverloadedTemplateStorage *Storage = Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate(); | 
 |   assert(Storage); | 
 |   // DNInfo work in progress: CHECKME: what about DNLoc? | 
 |   return DeclarationNameInfo((*Storage->begin())->getDeclName(), NameLoc); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | TemplateName ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateName(TemplateName Name) const { | 
 |   if (TemplateDecl *Template = Name.getAsTemplateDecl()) { | 
 |     if (TemplateTemplateParmDecl *TTP  | 
 |                               = dyn_cast<TemplateTemplateParmDecl>(Template)) | 
 |       Template = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(TTP); | 
 |    | 
 |     // The canonical template name is the canonical template declaration. | 
 |     return TemplateName(cast<TemplateDecl>(Template->getCanonicalDecl())); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *SubstPack | 
 |                                   = Name.getAsSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack()) { | 
 |     TemplateTemplateParmDecl *CanonParam | 
 |       = getCanonicalTemplateTemplateParmDecl(SubstPack->getParameterPack()); | 
 |     TemplateArgument CanonArgPack | 
 |       = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(SubstPack->getArgumentPack()); | 
 |     return getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(CanonParam, CanonArgPack); | 
 |   } | 
 |        | 
 |   assert(!Name.getAsOverloadedTemplate()); | 
 |  | 
 |   DependentTemplateName *DTN = Name.getAsDependentTemplateName(); | 
 |   assert(DTN && "Non-dependent template names must refer to template decls."); | 
 |   return DTN->CanonicalTemplateName; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::hasSameTemplateName(TemplateName X, TemplateName Y) { | 
 |   X = getCanonicalTemplateName(X); | 
 |   Y = getCanonicalTemplateName(Y); | 
 |   return X.getAsVoidPointer() == Y.getAsVoidPointer(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | TemplateArgument | 
 | ASTContext::getCanonicalTemplateArgument(const TemplateArgument &Arg) const { | 
 |   switch (Arg.getKind()) { | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Null: | 
 |       return Arg; | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Expression: | 
 |       return Arg; | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Declaration: | 
 |       return TemplateArgument(Arg.getAsDecl()->getCanonicalDecl()); | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Template: | 
 |       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName(Arg.getAsTemplate())); | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::TemplateExpansion: | 
 |       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalTemplateName( | 
 |                                          Arg.getAsTemplateOrTemplatePattern()), | 
 |                               Arg.getNumTemplateExpansions()); | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Integral: | 
 |       return TemplateArgument(*Arg.getAsIntegral(), | 
 |                               getCanonicalType(Arg.getIntegralType())); | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Type: | 
 |       return TemplateArgument(getCanonicalType(Arg.getAsType())); | 
 |  | 
 |     case TemplateArgument::Pack: { | 
 |       if (Arg.pack_size() == 0) | 
 |         return Arg; | 
 |        | 
 |       TemplateArgument *CanonArgs | 
 |         = new (*this) TemplateArgument[Arg.pack_size()]; | 
 |       unsigned Idx = 0; | 
 |       for (TemplateArgument::pack_iterator A = Arg.pack_begin(), | 
 |                                         AEnd = Arg.pack_end(); | 
 |            A != AEnd; (void)++A, ++Idx) | 
 |         CanonArgs[Idx] = getCanonicalTemplateArgument(*A); | 
 |  | 
 |       return TemplateArgument(CanonArgs, Arg.pack_size()); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Silence GCC warning | 
 |   assert(false && "Unhandled template argument kind"); | 
 |   return TemplateArgument(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | NestedNameSpecifier * | 
 | ASTContext::getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS) const { | 
 |   if (!NNS) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   switch (NNS->getKind()) { | 
 |   case NestedNameSpecifier::Identifier: | 
 |     // Canonicalize the prefix but keep the identifier the same. | 
 |     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, | 
 |                          getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS->getPrefix()), | 
 |                                        NNS->getAsIdentifier()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case NestedNameSpecifier::Namespace: | 
 |     // A namespace is canonical; build a nested-name-specifier with | 
 |     // this namespace and no prefix. | 
 |     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, NNS->getAsNamespace()); | 
 |  | 
 |   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpec: | 
 |   case NestedNameSpecifier::TypeSpecWithTemplate: { | 
 |     QualType T = getCanonicalType(QualType(NNS->getAsType(), 0)); | 
 |      | 
 |     // If we have some kind of dependent-named type (e.g., "typename T::type"), | 
 |     // break it apart into its prefix and identifier, then reconsititute those | 
 |     // as the canonical nested-name-specifier. This is required to canonicalize | 
 |     // a dependent nested-name-specifier involving typedefs of dependent-name | 
 |     // types, e.g., | 
 |     //   typedef typename T::type T1; | 
 |     //   typedef typename T1::type T2; | 
 |     if (const DependentNameType *DNT = T->getAs<DependentNameType>()) { | 
 |       NestedNameSpecifier *Prefix | 
 |         = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(DNT->getQualifier()); | 
 |       return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, Prefix,  | 
 |                            const_cast<IdentifierInfo *>(DNT->getIdentifier())); | 
 |     }     | 
 |  | 
 |     // Do the same thing as above, but with dependent-named specializations. | 
 |     if (const DependentTemplateSpecializationType *DTST | 
 |           = T->getAs<DependentTemplateSpecializationType>()) { | 
 |       NestedNameSpecifier *Prefix | 
 |         = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(DTST->getQualifier()); | 
 |       TemplateName Name | 
 |         = getDependentTemplateName(Prefix, DTST->getIdentifier()); | 
 |       T = getTemplateSpecializationType(Name,  | 
 |                                         DTST->getArgs(), DTST->getNumArgs()); | 
 |       T = getCanonicalType(T); | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     return NestedNameSpecifier::Create(*this, 0, false, | 
 |                                        const_cast<Type*>(T.getTypePtr())); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   case NestedNameSpecifier::Global: | 
 |     // The global specifier is canonical and unique. | 
 |     return NNS; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Required to silence a GCC warning | 
 |   return 0; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | const ArrayType *ASTContext::getAsArrayType(QualType T) const { | 
 |   // Handle the non-qualified case efficiently. | 
 |   if (!T.hasLocalQualifiers()) { | 
 |     // Handle the common positive case fast. | 
 |     if (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T)) | 
 |       return AT; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Handle the common negative case fast. | 
 |   if (!isa<ArrayType>(T.getCanonicalType())) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Apply any qualifiers from the array type to the element type.  This | 
 |   // implements C99 6.7.3p8: "If the specification of an array type includes | 
 |   // any type qualifiers, the element type is so qualified, not the array type." | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we get here, we either have type qualifiers on the type, or we have | 
 |   // sugar such as a typedef in the way.  If we have type qualifiers on the type | 
 |   // we must propagate them down into the element type. | 
 |  | 
 |   SplitQualType split = T.getSplitDesugaredType(); | 
 |   Qualifiers qs = split.second; | 
 |  | 
 |   // If we have a simple case, just return now. | 
 |   const ArrayType *ATy = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(split.first); | 
 |   if (ATy == 0 || qs.empty()) | 
 |     return ATy; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, we have an array and we have qualifiers on it.  Push the | 
 |   // qualifiers into the array element type and return a new array type. | 
 |   QualType NewEltTy = getQualifiedType(ATy->getElementType(), qs); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(ATy)) | 
 |     return cast<ArrayType>(getConstantArrayType(NewEltTy, CAT->getSize(), | 
 |                                                 CAT->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                            CAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers())); | 
 |   if (const IncompleteArrayType *IAT = dyn_cast<IncompleteArrayType>(ATy)) | 
 |     return cast<ArrayType>(getIncompleteArrayType(NewEltTy, | 
 |                                                   IAT->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                            IAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers())); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const DependentSizedArrayType *DSAT | 
 |         = dyn_cast<DependentSizedArrayType>(ATy)) | 
 |     return cast<ArrayType>( | 
 |                      getDependentSizedArrayType(NewEltTy, | 
 |                                                 DSAT->getSizeExpr(), | 
 |                                                 DSAT->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                               DSAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), | 
 |                                                 DSAT->getBracketsRange())); | 
 |  | 
 |   const VariableArrayType *VAT = cast<VariableArrayType>(ATy); | 
 |   return cast<ArrayType>(getVariableArrayType(NewEltTy, | 
 |                                               VAT->getSizeExpr(), | 
 |                                               VAT->getSizeModifier(), | 
 |                                               VAT->getIndexTypeCVRQualifiers(), | 
 |                                               VAT->getBracketsRange())); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getArrayDecayedType - Return the properly qualified result of decaying the | 
 | /// specified array type to a pointer.  This operation is non-trivial when | 
 | /// handling typedefs etc.  The canonical type of "T" must be an array type, | 
 | /// this returns a pointer to a properly qualified element of the array. | 
 | /// | 
 | /// See C99 6.7.5.3p7 and C99 6.3.2.1p3. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getArrayDecayedType(QualType Ty) const { | 
 |   // Get the element type with 'getAsArrayType' so that we don't lose any | 
 |   // typedefs in the element type of the array.  This also handles propagation | 
 |   // of type qualifiers from the array type into the element type if present | 
 |   // (C99 6.7.3p8). | 
 |   const ArrayType *PrettyArrayType = getAsArrayType(Ty); | 
 |   assert(PrettyArrayType && "Not an array type!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType PtrTy = getPointerType(PrettyArrayType->getElementType()); | 
 |  | 
 |   // int x[restrict 4] ->  int *restrict | 
 |   return getQualifiedType(PtrTy, PrettyArrayType->getIndexTypeQualifiers()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(const ArrayType *array) const { | 
 |   return getBaseElementType(array->getElementType()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getBaseElementType(QualType type) const { | 
 |   Qualifiers qs; | 
 |   while (true) { | 
 |     SplitQualType split = type.getSplitDesugaredType(); | 
 |     const ArrayType *array = split.first->getAsArrayTypeUnsafe(); | 
 |     if (!array) break; | 
 |  | 
 |     type = array->getElementType(); | 
 |     qs.addConsistentQualifiers(split.second); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return getQualifiedType(type, qs); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getConstantArrayElementCount - Returns number of constant array elements. | 
 | uint64_t | 
 | ASTContext::getConstantArrayElementCount(const ConstantArrayType *CA)  const { | 
 |   uint64_t ElementCount = 1; | 
 |   do { | 
 |     ElementCount *= CA->getSize().getZExtValue(); | 
 |     CA = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(CA->getElementType()); | 
 |   } while (CA); | 
 |   return ElementCount; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFloatingRank - Return a relative rank for floating point types. | 
 | /// This routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't a float. | 
 | static FloatingRank getFloatingRank(QualType T) { | 
 |   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) | 
 |     return getFloatingRank(CT->getElementType()); | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(T->getAs<BuiltinType>() && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type"); | 
 |   switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) { | 
 |   default: assert(0 && "getFloatingRank(): not a floating type"); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Float:      return FloatRank; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Double:     return DoubleRank; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return LongDoubleRank; | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain - Returns a real floating | 
 | /// point or a complex type (based on typeDomain/typeSize). | 
 | /// 'typeDomain' is a real floating point or complex type. | 
 | /// 'typeSize' is a real floating point or complex type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(QualType Size, | 
 |                                                        QualType Domain) const { | 
 |   FloatingRank EltRank = getFloatingRank(Size); | 
 |   if (Domain->isComplexType()) { | 
 |     switch (EltRank) { | 
 |     default: assert(0 && "getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank"); | 
 |     case FloatRank:      return FloatComplexTy; | 
 |     case DoubleRank:     return DoubleComplexTy; | 
 |     case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleComplexTy; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(Domain->isRealFloatingType() && "Unknown domain!"); | 
 |   switch (EltRank) { | 
 |   default: assert(0 && "getFloatingRank(): illegal value for rank"); | 
 |   case FloatRank:      return FloatTy; | 
 |   case DoubleRank:     return DoubleTy; | 
 |   case LongDoubleRank: return LongDoubleTy; | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFloatingTypeOrder - Compare the rank of the two specified floating | 
 | /// point types, ignoring the domain of the type (i.e. 'double' == | 
 | /// '_Complex double').  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If | 
 | /// LHS < RHS, return -1. | 
 | int ASTContext::getFloatingTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const { | 
 |   FloatingRank LHSR = getFloatingRank(LHS); | 
 |   FloatingRank RHSR = getFloatingRank(RHS); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (LHSR == RHSR) | 
 |     return 0; | 
 |   if (LHSR > RHSR) | 
 |     return 1; | 
 |   return -1; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getIntegerRank - Return an integer conversion rank (C99 6.3.1.1p1). This | 
 | /// routine will assert if passed a built-in type that isn't an integer or enum, | 
 | /// or if it is not canonicalized. | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::getIntegerRank(const Type *T) const { | 
 |   assert(T->isCanonicalUnqualified() && "T should be canonicalized"); | 
 |   if (const EnumType* ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T)) | 
 |     T = ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType().getTypePtr(); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::WChar_S) || | 
 |       T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::WChar_U)) | 
 |     T = getFromTargetType(Target.getWCharType()).getTypePtr(); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Char16)) | 
 |     T = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar16Type()).getTypePtr(); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (T->isSpecificBuiltinType(BuiltinType::Char32)) | 
 |     T = getFromTargetType(Target.getChar32Type()).getTypePtr(); | 
 |  | 
 |   switch (cast<BuiltinType>(T)->getKind()) { | 
 |   default: assert(0 && "getIntegerRank(): not a built-in integer"); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Bool: | 
 |     return 1 + (getIntWidth(BoolTy) << 3); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Char_S: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Char_U: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::SChar: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::UChar: | 
 |     return 2 + (getIntWidth(CharTy) << 3); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Short: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::UShort: | 
 |     return 3 + (getIntWidth(ShortTy) << 3); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Int: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::UInt: | 
 |     return 4 + (getIntWidth(IntTy) << 3); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Long: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::ULong: | 
 |     return 5 + (getIntWidth(LongTy) << 3); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::LongLong: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::ULongLong: | 
 |     return 6 + (getIntWidth(LongLongTy) << 3); | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Int128: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::UInt128: | 
 |     return 7 + (getIntWidth(Int128Ty) << 3); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Whether this is a promotable bitfield reference according | 
 | /// to C99 6.3.1.1p2, bullet 2 (and GCC extensions). | 
 | /// | 
 | /// \returns the type this bit-field will promote to, or NULL if no | 
 | /// promotion occurs. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::isPromotableBitField(Expr *E) const { | 
 |   if (E->isTypeDependent() || E->isValueDependent()) | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |    | 
 |   FieldDecl *Field = E->getBitField(); | 
 |   if (!Field) | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType FT = Field->getType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::APSInt BitWidthAP = Field->getBitWidth()->EvaluateAsInt(*this); | 
 |   uint64_t BitWidth = BitWidthAP.getZExtValue(); | 
 |   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy); | 
 |   // GCC extension compatibility: if the bit-field size is less than or equal | 
 |   // to the size of int, it gets promoted no matter what its type is. | 
 |   // For instance, unsigned long bf : 4 gets promoted to signed int. | 
 |   if (BitWidth < IntSize) | 
 |     return IntTy; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (BitWidth == IntSize) | 
 |     return FT->isSignedIntegerType() ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Types bigger than int are not subject to promotions, and therefore act | 
 |   // like the base type. | 
 |   // FIXME: This doesn't quite match what gcc does, but what gcc does here | 
 |   // is ridiculous. | 
 |   return QualType(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getPromotedIntegerType - Returns the type that Promotable will | 
 | /// promote to: C99 6.3.1.1p2, assuming that Promotable is a promotable | 
 | /// integer type. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getPromotedIntegerType(QualType Promotable) const { | 
 |   assert(!Promotable.isNull()); | 
 |   assert(Promotable->isPromotableIntegerType()); | 
 |   if (const EnumType *ET = Promotable->getAs<EnumType>()) | 
 |     return ET->getDecl()->getPromotionType(); | 
 |   if (Promotable->isSignedIntegerType()) | 
 |     return IntTy; | 
 |   uint64_t PromotableSize = getTypeSize(Promotable); | 
 |   uint64_t IntSize = getTypeSize(IntTy); | 
 |   assert(Promotable->isUnsignedIntegerType() && PromotableSize <= IntSize); | 
 |   return (PromotableSize != IntSize) ? IntTy : UnsignedIntTy; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getIntegerTypeOrder - Returns the highest ranked integer type: | 
 | /// C99 6.3.1.8p1.  If LHS > RHS, return 1.  If LHS == RHS, return 0. If | 
 | /// LHS < RHS, return -1. | 
 | int ASTContext::getIntegerTypeOrder(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) const { | 
 |   const Type *LHSC = getCanonicalType(LHS).getTypePtr(); | 
 |   const Type *RHSC = getCanonicalType(RHS).getTypePtr(); | 
 |   if (LHSC == RHSC) return 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   bool LHSUnsigned = LHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType(); | 
 |   bool RHSUnsigned = RHSC->isUnsignedIntegerType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   unsigned LHSRank = getIntegerRank(LHSC); | 
 |   unsigned RHSRank = getIntegerRank(RHSC); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (LHSUnsigned == RHSUnsigned) {  // Both signed or both unsigned. | 
 |     if (LHSRank == RHSRank) return 0; | 
 |     return LHSRank > RHSRank ? 1 : -1; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Otherwise, the LHS is signed and the RHS is unsigned or visa versa. | 
 |   if (LHSUnsigned) { | 
 |     // If the unsigned [LHS] type is larger, return it. | 
 |     if (LHSRank >= RHSRank) | 
 |       return 1; | 
 |  | 
 |     // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it | 
 |     // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are | 
 |     // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe. | 
 |     return -1; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the unsigned [RHS] type is larger, return it. | 
 |   if (RHSRank >= LHSRank) | 
 |     return -1; | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the signed type can represent all values of the unsigned type, it | 
 |   // wins.  Because we are dealing with 2's complement and types that are | 
 |   // powers of two larger than each other, this is always safe. | 
 |   return 1; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | static RecordDecl * | 
 | CreateRecordDecl(const ASTContext &Ctx, RecordDecl::TagKind TK, DeclContext *DC, | 
 |                  SourceLocation L, IdentifierInfo *Id) { | 
 |   if (Ctx.getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) | 
 |     return CXXRecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, L, Id); | 
 |   else | 
 |     return RecordDecl::Create(Ctx, TK, DC, L, Id); | 
 | } | 
 |                                      | 
 | // getCFConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant CFStrings. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getCFConstantStringType() const { | 
 |   if (!CFConstantStringTypeDecl) { | 
 |     CFConstantStringTypeDecl = | 
 |       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                        &Idents.get("NSConstantString")); | 
 |     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition(); | 
 |  | 
 |     QualType FieldTypes[4]; | 
 |  | 
 |     // const int *isa; | 
 |     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst()); | 
 |     // int flags; | 
 |     FieldTypes[1] = IntTy; | 
 |     // const char *str; | 
 |     FieldTypes[2] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst()); | 
 |     // long length; | 
 |     FieldTypes[3] = LongTy; | 
 |  | 
 |     // Create fields | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { | 
 |       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, CFConstantStringTypeDecl, | 
 |                                            SourceLocation(), 0, | 
 |                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                            /*BitWidth=*/0, | 
 |                                            /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |       Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |       CFConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     CFConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return getTagDeclType(CFConstantStringTypeDecl); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setCFConstantStringType(QualType T) { | 
 |   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>(); | 
 |   assert(Rec && "Invalid CFConstantStringType"); | 
 |   CFConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | // getNSConstantStringType - Return the type used for constant NSStrings. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getNSConstantStringType() const { | 
 |   if (!NSConstantStringTypeDecl) { | 
 |     NSConstantStringTypeDecl = | 
 |     CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                      &Idents.get("__builtin_NSString")); | 
 |     NSConstantStringTypeDecl->startDefinition(); | 
 |      | 
 |     QualType FieldTypes[3]; | 
 |      | 
 |     // const int *isa; | 
 |     FieldTypes[0] = getPointerType(IntTy.withConst()); | 
 |     // const char *str; | 
 |     FieldTypes[1] = getPointerType(CharTy.withConst()); | 
 |     // unsigned int length; | 
 |     FieldTypes[2] = UnsignedIntTy; | 
 |      | 
 |     // Create fields | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0; i < 3; ++i) { | 
 |       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, NSConstantStringTypeDecl, | 
 |                                            SourceLocation(), 0, | 
 |                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                            /*BitWidth=*/0, | 
 |                                            /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |       Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |       NSConstantStringTypeDecl->addDecl(Field); | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     NSConstantStringTypeDecl->completeDefinition(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   return getTagDeclType(NSConstantStringTypeDecl); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setNSConstantStringType(QualType T) { | 
 |   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>(); | 
 |   assert(Rec && "Invalid NSConstantStringType"); | 
 |   NSConstantStringTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getObjCFastEnumerationStateType() const { | 
 |   if (!ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl) { | 
 |     ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl = | 
 |       CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                        &Idents.get("__objcFastEnumerationState")); | 
 |     ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl->startDefinition(); | 
 |  | 
 |     QualType FieldTypes[] = { | 
 |       UnsignedLongTy, | 
 |       getPointerType(ObjCIdTypedefType), | 
 |       getPointerType(UnsignedLongTy), | 
 |       getConstantArrayType(UnsignedLongTy, | 
 |                            llvm::APInt(32, 5), ArrayType::Normal, 0) | 
 |     }; | 
 |  | 
 |     for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { | 
 |       FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, | 
 |                                            ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl, | 
 |                                            SourceLocation(), 0, | 
 |                                            FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                            /*BitWidth=*/0, | 
 |                                            /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |       Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |       ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl->addDecl(Field); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl->completeDefinition(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return getTagDeclType(ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorType() const { | 
 |   if (BlockDescriptorType) | 
 |     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType); | 
 |  | 
 |   RecordDecl *T; | 
 |   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit. | 
 |   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor")); | 
 |   T->startDefinition(); | 
 |    | 
 |   QualType FieldTypes[] = { | 
 |     UnsignedLongTy, | 
 |     UnsignedLongTy, | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   const char *FieldNames[] = { | 
 |     "reserved", | 
 |     "Size" | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   for (size_t i = 0; i < 2; ++i) { | 
 |     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, | 
 |                                          T, | 
 |                                          SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), | 
 |                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |     Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |     T->addDecl(Field); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T->completeDefinition(); | 
 |  | 
 |   BlockDescriptorType = T; | 
 |  | 
 |   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorType); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setBlockDescriptorType(QualType T) { | 
 |   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>(); | 
 |   assert(Rec && "Invalid BlockDescriptorType"); | 
 |   BlockDescriptorType = Rec->getDecl(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getBlockDescriptorExtendedType() const { | 
 |   if (BlockDescriptorExtendedType) | 
 |     return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType); | 
 |  | 
 |   RecordDecl *T; | 
 |   // FIXME: Needs the FlagAppleBlock bit. | 
 |   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                        &Idents.get("__block_descriptor_withcopydispose")); | 
 |   T->startDefinition(); | 
 |    | 
 |   QualType FieldTypes[] = { | 
 |     UnsignedLongTy, | 
 |     UnsignedLongTy, | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy) | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   const char *FieldNames[] = { | 
 |     "reserved", | 
 |     "Size", | 
 |     "CopyFuncPtr", | 
 |     "DestroyFuncPtr" | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   for (size_t i = 0; i < 4; ++i) { | 
 |     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, | 
 |                                          T, | 
 |                                          SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), | 
 |                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |     Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |     T->addDecl(Field); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T->completeDefinition(); | 
 |  | 
 |   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = T; | 
 |  | 
 |   return getTagDeclType(BlockDescriptorExtendedType); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setBlockDescriptorExtendedType(QualType T) { | 
 |   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>(); | 
 |   assert(Rec && "Invalid BlockDescriptorType"); | 
 |   BlockDescriptorExtendedType = Rec->getDecl(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::BlockRequiresCopying(QualType Ty) const { | 
 |   if (Ty->isBlockPointerType()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   if (isObjCNSObjectType(Ty)) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) { | 
 |     if (const RecordType *RT = Ty->getAs<RecordType>()) { | 
 |       CXXRecordDecl *RD = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl()); | 
 |       return RD->hasConstCopyConstructor(*this); | 
 |        | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType | 
 | ASTContext::BuildByRefType(llvm::StringRef DeclName, QualType Ty) const { | 
 |   //  type = struct __Block_byref_1_X { | 
 |   //    void *__isa; | 
 |   //    struct __Block_byref_1_X *__forwarding; | 
 |   //    unsigned int __flags; | 
 |   //    unsigned int __size; | 
 |   //    void *__copy_helper;            // as needed | 
 |   //    void *__destroy_help            // as needed | 
 |   //    int X; | 
 |   //  } * | 
 |  | 
 |   bool HasCopyAndDispose = BlockRequiresCopying(Ty); | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: Move up | 
 |   llvm::SmallString<36> Name; | 
 |   llvm::raw_svector_ostream(Name) << "__Block_byref_" << | 
 |                                   ++UniqueBlockByRefTypeID << '_' << DeclName; | 
 |   RecordDecl *T; | 
 |   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                        &Idents.get(Name.str())); | 
 |   T->startDefinition(); | 
 |   QualType Int32Ty = IntTy; | 
 |   assert(getIntWidth(IntTy) == 32 && "non-32bit int not supported"); | 
 |   QualType FieldTypes[] = { | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), | 
 |     getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T)), | 
 |     Int32Ty, | 
 |     Int32Ty, | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), | 
 |     Ty | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::StringRef FieldNames[] = { | 
 |     "__isa", | 
 |     "__forwarding", | 
 |     "__flags", | 
 |     "__size", | 
 |     "__copy_helper", | 
 |     "__destroy_helper", | 
 |     DeclName, | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   for (size_t i = 0; i < 7; ++i) { | 
 |     if (!HasCopyAndDispose && i >=4 && i <= 5) | 
 |       continue; | 
 |     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), | 
 |                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |     Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |     T->addDecl(Field); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T->completeDefinition(); | 
 |  | 
 |   return getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getBlockParmType( | 
 |   bool BlockHasCopyDispose, | 
 |   llvm::SmallVectorImpl<const Expr *> &Layout) const { | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: Move up | 
 |   llvm::SmallString<36> Name; | 
 |   llvm::raw_svector_ostream(Name) << "__block_literal_" | 
 |                                   << ++UniqueBlockParmTypeID; | 
 |   RecordDecl *T; | 
 |   T = CreateRecordDecl(*this, TTK_Struct, TUDecl, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                        &Idents.get(Name.str())); | 
 |   T->startDefinition(); | 
 |   QualType FieldTypes[] = { | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), | 
 |     IntTy, | 
 |     IntTy, | 
 |     getPointerType(VoidPtrTy), | 
 |     (BlockHasCopyDispose ? | 
 |      getPointerType(getBlockDescriptorExtendedType()) : | 
 |      getPointerType(getBlockDescriptorType())) | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   const char *FieldNames[] = { | 
 |     "__isa", | 
 |     "__flags", | 
 |     "__reserved", | 
 |     "__FuncPtr", | 
 |     "__descriptor" | 
 |   }; | 
 |  | 
 |   for (size_t i = 0; i < 5; ++i) { | 
 |     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                          &Idents.get(FieldNames[i]), | 
 |                                          FieldTypes[i], /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |     Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |     T->addDecl(Field); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   for (unsigned i = 0; i < Layout.size(); ++i) { | 
 |     const Expr *E = Layout[i]; | 
 |  | 
 |     QualType FieldType = E->getType(); | 
 |     IdentifierInfo *FieldName = 0; | 
 |     if (isa<CXXThisExpr>(E)) { | 
 |       FieldName = &Idents.get("this"); | 
 |     } else if (const BlockDeclRefExpr *BDRE = dyn_cast<BlockDeclRefExpr>(E)) { | 
 |       const ValueDecl *D = BDRE->getDecl(); | 
 |       FieldName = D->getIdentifier(); | 
 |       if (BDRE->isByRef()) | 
 |         FieldType = BuildByRefType(D->getName(), FieldType); | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       // Padding. | 
 |       assert(isa<ConstantArrayType>(FieldType) && | 
 |              isa<DeclRefExpr>(E) && | 
 |              !cast<DeclRefExpr>(E)->getDecl()->getDeclName() && | 
 |              "doesn't match characteristics of padding decl"); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     FieldDecl *Field = FieldDecl::Create(*this, T, SourceLocation(), | 
 |                                          FieldName, FieldType, /*TInfo=*/0, | 
 |                                          /*BitWidth=*/0, /*Mutable=*/false); | 
 |     Field->setAccess(AS_public); | 
 |     T->addDecl(Field); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   T->completeDefinition(); | 
 |  | 
 |   return getPointerType(getTagDeclType(T)); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCFastEnumerationStateType(QualType T) { | 
 |   const RecordType *Rec = T->getAs<RecordType>(); | 
 |   assert(Rec && "Invalid ObjCFAstEnumerationStateType"); | 
 |   ObjCFastEnumerationStateTypeDecl = Rec->getDecl(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | // This returns true if a type has been typedefed to BOOL: | 
 | // typedef <type> BOOL; | 
 | static bool isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(QualType T) { | 
 |   if (const TypedefType *TT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(T)) | 
 |     if (IdentifierInfo *II = TT->getDecl()->getIdentifier()) | 
 |       return II->isStr("BOOL"); | 
 |  | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCEncodingTypeSize returns size of type for objective-c encoding | 
 | /// purpose. | 
 | CharUnits ASTContext::getObjCEncodingTypeSize(QualType type) const { | 
 |   CharUnits sz = getTypeSizeInChars(type); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Make all integer and enum types at least as large as an int | 
 |   if (sz.isPositive() && type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) | 
 |     sz = std::max(sz, getTypeSizeInChars(IntTy)); | 
 |   // Treat arrays as pointers, since that's how they're passed in. | 
 |   else if (type->isArrayType()) | 
 |     sz = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy); | 
 |   return sz; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | static inline  | 
 | std::string charUnitsToString(const CharUnits &CU) { | 
 |   return llvm::itostr(CU.getQuantity()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCEncodingForBlock - Return the encoded type for this block | 
 | /// declaration. | 
 | std::string ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForBlock(const BlockExpr *Expr) const { | 
 |   std::string S; | 
 |  | 
 |   const BlockDecl *Decl = Expr->getBlockDecl(); | 
 |   QualType BlockTy = | 
 |       Expr->getType()->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |   // Encode result type. | 
 |   getObjCEncodingForType(BlockTy->getAs<FunctionType>()->getResultType(), S); | 
 |   // Compute size of all parameters. | 
 |   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes. | 
 |   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation! | 
 |   SourceLocation Loc; | 
 |   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy); | 
 |   CharUnits ParmOffset = PtrSize; | 
 |   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), | 
 |        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { | 
 |     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType(); | 
 |     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); | 
 |     assert (sz.isPositive() && "BlockExpr - Incomplete param type"); | 
 |     ParmOffset += sz; | 
 |   } | 
 |   // Size of the argument frame | 
 |   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); | 
 |   // Block pointer and offset. | 
 |   S += "@?0"; | 
 |   ParmOffset = PtrSize; | 
 |    | 
 |   // Argument types. | 
 |   ParmOffset = PtrSize; | 
 |   for (BlockDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), E = | 
 |        Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { | 
 |     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI; | 
 |     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType();  | 
 |     if (const ArrayType *AT = | 
 |           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { | 
 |       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of | 
 |       // elements. | 
 |       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) | 
 |         PType = PVDecl->getType(); | 
 |     } else if (PType->isFunctionType()) | 
 |       PType = PVDecl->getType(); | 
 |     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S); | 
 |     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); | 
 |     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return S; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForFunctionDecl(const FunctionDecl *Decl, | 
 |                                                 std::string& S) { | 
 |   // Encode result type. | 
 |   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S); | 
 |   CharUnits ParmOffset; | 
 |   // Compute size of all parameters. | 
 |   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), | 
 |        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { | 
 |     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType(); | 
 |     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); | 
 |     assert (sz.isPositive() &&  | 
 |         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type"); | 
 |     ParmOffset += sz; | 
 |   } | 
 |   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); | 
 |   ParmOffset = CharUnits::Zero(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Argument types. | 
 |   for (FunctionDecl::param_const_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), | 
 |        E = Decl->param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { | 
 |     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI; | 
 |     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType(); | 
 |     if (const ArrayType *AT = | 
 |           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { | 
 |       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of | 
 |       // elements. | 
 |       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) | 
 |         PType = PVDecl->getType(); | 
 |     } else if (PType->isFunctionType()) | 
 |       PType = PVDecl->getType(); | 
 |     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S); | 
 |     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); | 
 |     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Return the encoded type for this method | 
 | /// declaration. | 
 | void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl(const ObjCMethodDecl *Decl, | 
 |                                               std::string& S) const { | 
 |   // FIXME: This is not very efficient. | 
 |   // Encode type qualifer, 'in', 'inout', etc. for the return type. | 
 |   getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl->getObjCDeclQualifier(), S); | 
 |   // Encode result type. | 
 |   getObjCEncodingForType(Decl->getResultType(), S); | 
 |   // Compute size of all parameters. | 
 |   // Start with computing size of a pointer in number of bytes. | 
 |   // FIXME: There might(should) be a better way of doing this computation! | 
 |   SourceLocation Loc; | 
 |   CharUnits PtrSize = getTypeSizeInChars(VoidPtrTy); | 
 |   // The first two arguments (self and _cmd) are pointers; account for | 
 |   // their size. | 
 |   CharUnits ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize; | 
 |   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), | 
 |        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { | 
 |     QualType PType = (*PI)->getType(); | 
 |     CharUnits sz = getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); | 
 |     assert (sz.isPositive() &&  | 
 |         "getObjCEncodingForMethodDecl - Incomplete param type"); | 
 |     ParmOffset += sz; | 
 |   } | 
 |   S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); | 
 |   S += "@0:"; | 
 |   S += charUnitsToString(PtrSize); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Argument types. | 
 |   ParmOffset = 2 * PtrSize; | 
 |   for (ObjCMethodDecl::param_iterator PI = Decl->param_begin(), | 
 |        E = Decl->sel_param_end(); PI != E; ++PI) { | 
 |     ParmVarDecl *PVDecl = *PI; | 
 |     QualType PType = PVDecl->getOriginalType(); | 
 |     if (const ArrayType *AT = | 
 |           dyn_cast<ArrayType>(PType->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { | 
 |       // Use array's original type only if it has known number of | 
 |       // elements. | 
 |       if (!isa<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) | 
 |         PType = PVDecl->getType(); | 
 |     } else if (PType->isFunctionType()) | 
 |       PType = PVDecl->getType(); | 
 |     // Process argument qualifiers for user supplied arguments; such as, | 
 |     // 'in', 'inout', etc. | 
 |     getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(PVDecl->getObjCDeclQualifier(), S); | 
 |     getObjCEncodingForType(PType, S); | 
 |     S += charUnitsToString(ParmOffset); | 
 |     ParmOffset += getObjCEncodingTypeSize(PType); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl - Return the encoded type for this | 
 | /// property declaration. If non-NULL, Container must be either an | 
 | /// ObjCCategoryImplDecl or ObjCImplementationDecl; it should only be | 
 | /// NULL when getting encodings for protocol properties. | 
 | /// Property attributes are stored as a comma-delimited C string. The simple | 
 | /// attributes readonly and bycopy are encoded as single characters. The | 
 | /// parametrized attributes, getter=name, setter=name, and ivar=name, are | 
 | /// encoded as single characters, followed by an identifier. Property types | 
 | /// are also encoded as a parametrized attribute. The characters used to encode | 
 | /// these attributes are defined by the following enumeration: | 
 | /// @code | 
 | /// enum PropertyAttributes { | 
 | /// kPropertyReadOnly = 'R',   // property is read-only. | 
 | /// kPropertyBycopy = 'C',     // property is a copy of the value last assigned | 
 | /// kPropertyByref = '&',  // property is a reference to the value last assigned | 
 | /// kPropertyDynamic = 'D',    // property is dynamic | 
 | /// kPropertyGetter = 'G',     // followed by getter selector name | 
 | /// kPropertySetter = 'S',     // followed by setter selector name | 
 | /// kPropertyInstanceVariable = 'V'  // followed by instance variable  name | 
 | /// kPropertyType = 't'              // followed by old-style type encoding. | 
 | /// kPropertyWeak = 'W'              // 'weak' property | 
 | /// kPropertyStrong = 'P'            // property GC'able | 
 | /// kPropertyNonAtomic = 'N'         // property non-atomic | 
 | /// }; | 
 | /// @endcode | 
 | void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForPropertyDecl(const ObjCPropertyDecl *PD, | 
 |                                                 const Decl *Container, | 
 |                                                 std::string& S) const { | 
 |   // Collect information from the property implementation decl(s). | 
 |   bool Dynamic = false; | 
 |   ObjCPropertyImplDecl *SynthesizePID = 0; | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: Duplicated code due to poor abstraction. | 
 |   if (Container) { | 
 |     if (const ObjCCategoryImplDecl *CID = | 
 |         dyn_cast<ObjCCategoryImplDecl>(Container)) { | 
 |       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator | 
 |              i = CID->propimpl_begin(), e = CID->propimpl_end(); | 
 |            i != e; ++i) { | 
 |         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i; | 
 |         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) { | 
 |           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) { | 
 |             Dynamic = true; | 
 |           } else { | 
 |             SynthesizePID = PID; | 
 |           } | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       const ObjCImplementationDecl *OID=cast<ObjCImplementationDecl>(Container); | 
 |       for (ObjCCategoryImplDecl::propimpl_iterator | 
 |              i = OID->propimpl_begin(), e = OID->propimpl_end(); | 
 |            i != e; ++i) { | 
 |         ObjCPropertyImplDecl *PID = *i; | 
 |         if (PID->getPropertyDecl() == PD) { | 
 |           if (PID->getPropertyImplementation()==ObjCPropertyImplDecl::Dynamic) { | 
 |             Dynamic = true; | 
 |           } else { | 
 |             SynthesizePID = PID; | 
 |           } | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: This is not very efficient. | 
 |   S = "T"; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Encode result type. | 
 |   // GCC has some special rules regarding encoding of properties which | 
 |   // closely resembles encoding of ivars. | 
 |   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PD->getType(), S, true, true, 0, | 
 |                              true /* outermost type */, | 
 |                              true /* encoding for property */); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (PD->isReadOnly()) { | 
 |     S += ",R"; | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     switch (PD->getSetterKind()) { | 
 |     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Assign: break; | 
 |     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Copy:   S += ",C"; break; | 
 |     case ObjCPropertyDecl::Retain: S += ",&"; break; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // It really isn't clear at all what this means, since properties | 
 |   // are "dynamic by default". | 
 |   if (Dynamic) | 
 |     S += ",D"; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_nonatomic) | 
 |     S += ",N"; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_getter) { | 
 |     S += ",G"; | 
 |     S += PD->getGetterName().getAsString(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (PD->getPropertyAttributes() & ObjCPropertyDecl::OBJC_PR_setter) { | 
 |     S += ",S"; | 
 |     S += PD->getSetterName().getAsString(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (SynthesizePID) { | 
 |     const ObjCIvarDecl *OID = SynthesizePID->getPropertyIvarDecl(); | 
 |     S += ",V"; | 
 |     S += OID->getNameAsString(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: OBJCGC: weak & strong | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding - | 
 | /// Another legacy compatibility encoding: 32-bit longs are encoded as | 
 | /// 'l' or 'L' , but not always.  For typedefs, we need to use | 
 | /// 'i' or 'I' instead if encoding a struct field, or a pointer! | 
 | /// | 
 | void ASTContext::getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding (QualType &PointeeTy) const { | 
 |   if (isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) { | 
 |     if (const BuiltinType *BT = PointeeTy->getAs<BuiltinType>()) { | 
 |       if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::ULong && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32) | 
 |         PointeeTy = UnsignedIntTy; | 
 |       else | 
 |         if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Long && getIntWidth(PointeeTy) == 32) | 
 |           PointeeTy = IntTy; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForType(QualType T, std::string& S, | 
 |                                         const FieldDecl *Field) const { | 
 |   // We follow the behavior of gcc, expanding structures which are | 
 |   // directly pointed to, and expanding embedded structures. Note that | 
 |   // these rules are sufficient to prevent recursive encoding of the | 
 |   // same type. | 
 |   getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(T, S, true, true, Field, | 
 |                              true /* outermost type */); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | static char ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(const ASTContext *C, QualType T) { | 
 |     switch (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()->getKind()) { | 
 |     default: assert(0 && "Unhandled builtin type kind"); | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Void:       return 'v'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Bool:       return 'B'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Char_U: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UChar:      return 'C'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UShort:     return 'S'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UInt:       return 'I'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ULong: | 
 |         return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'L' : 'Q'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::UInt128:    return 'T'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::ULongLong:  return 'Q'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Char_S: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::SChar:      return 'c'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Short:      return 's'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::WChar_S: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::WChar_U: | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Int:        return 'i'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Long: | 
 |       return C->getIntWidth(T) == 32 ? 'l' : 'q'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::LongLong:   return 'q'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Int128:     return 't'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Float:      return 'f'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::Double:     return 'd'; | 
 |     case BuiltinType::LongDouble: return 'D'; | 
 |     } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | static void EncodeBitField(const ASTContext *Ctx, std::string& S, | 
 |                            QualType T, const FieldDecl *FD) { | 
 |   const Expr *E = FD->getBitWidth(); | 
 |   assert(E && "bitfield width not there - getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl"); | 
 |   S += 'b'; | 
 |   // The NeXT runtime encodes bit fields as b followed by the number of bits. | 
 |   // The GNU runtime requires more information; bitfields are encoded as b, | 
 |   // then the offset (in bits) of the first element, then the type of the | 
 |   // bitfield, then the size in bits.  For example, in this structure: | 
 |   // | 
 |   // struct | 
 |   // { | 
 |   //    int integer; | 
 |   //    int flags:2; | 
 |   // }; | 
 |   // On a 32-bit system, the encoding for flags would be b2 for the NeXT | 
 |   // runtime, but b32i2 for the GNU runtime.  The reason for this extra | 
 |   // information is not especially sensible, but we're stuck with it for | 
 |   // compatibility with GCC, although providing it breaks anything that | 
 |   // actually uses runtime introspection and wants to work on both runtimes... | 
 |   if (!Ctx->getLangOptions().NeXTRuntime) { | 
 |     const RecordDecl *RD = FD->getParent(); | 
 |     const ASTRecordLayout &RL = Ctx->getASTRecordLayout(RD); | 
 |     // FIXME: This same linear search is also used in ExprConstant - it might | 
 |     // be better if the FieldDecl stored its offset.  We'd be increasing the | 
 |     // size of the object slightly, but saving some time every time it is used. | 
 |     unsigned i = 0; | 
 |     for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RD->field_begin(), | 
 |                                  FieldEnd = RD->field_end(); | 
 |          Field != FieldEnd; (void)++Field, ++i) { | 
 |       if (*Field == FD) | 
 |         break; | 
 |     } | 
 |     S += llvm::utostr(RL.getFieldOffset(i)); | 
 |     if (T->isEnumeralType()) | 
 |       S += 'i'; | 
 |     else | 
 |       S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(Ctx, T); | 
 |   } | 
 |   unsigned N = E->EvaluateAsInt(*Ctx).getZExtValue(); | 
 |   S += llvm::utostr(N); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | // FIXME: Use SmallString for accumulating string. | 
 | void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(QualType T, std::string& S, | 
 |                                             bool ExpandPointedToStructures, | 
 |                                             bool ExpandStructures, | 
 |                                             const FieldDecl *FD, | 
 |                                             bool OutermostType, | 
 |                                             bool EncodingProperty) const { | 
 |   if (T->getAs<BuiltinType>()) { | 
 |     if (FD && FD->isBitField()) | 
 |       return EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD); | 
 |     S += ObjCEncodingForPrimitiveKind(this, T); | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ComplexType *CT = T->getAs<ComplexType>()) { | 
 |     S += 'j'; | 
 |     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(CT->getElementType(), S, false, false, 0, false, | 
 |                                false); | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   // encoding for pointer or r3eference types. | 
 |   QualType PointeeTy; | 
 |   if (const PointerType *PT = T->getAs<PointerType>()) { | 
 |     if (PT->isObjCSelType()) { | 
 |       S += ':'; | 
 |       return; | 
 |     } | 
 |     PointeeTy = PT->getPointeeType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |   else if (const ReferenceType *RT = T->getAs<ReferenceType>()) | 
 |     PointeeTy = RT->getPointeeType(); | 
 |   if (!PointeeTy.isNull()) { | 
 |     bool isReadOnly = false; | 
 |     // For historical/compatibility reasons, the read-only qualifier of the | 
 |     // pointee gets emitted _before_ the '^'.  The read-only qualifier of | 
 |     // the pointer itself gets ignored, _unless_ we are looking at a typedef! | 
 |     // Also, do not emit the 'r' for anything but the outermost type! | 
 |     if (isa<TypedefType>(T.getTypePtr())) { | 
 |       if (OutermostType && T.isConstQualified()) { | 
 |         isReadOnly = true; | 
 |         S += 'r'; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } else if (OutermostType) { | 
 |       QualType P = PointeeTy; | 
 |       while (P->getAs<PointerType>()) | 
 |         P = P->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |       if (P.isConstQualified()) { | 
 |         isReadOnly = true; | 
 |         S += 'r'; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (isReadOnly) { | 
 |       // Another legacy compatibility encoding. Some ObjC qualifier and type | 
 |       // combinations need to be rearranged. | 
 |       // Rewrite "in const" from "nr" to "rn" | 
 |       if (llvm::StringRef(S).endswith("nr")) | 
 |         S.replace(S.end()-2, S.end(), "rn"); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     if (PointeeTy->isCharType()) { | 
 |       // char pointer types should be encoded as '*' unless it is a | 
 |       // type that has been typedef'd to 'BOOL'. | 
 |       if (!isTypeTypedefedAsBOOL(PointeeTy)) { | 
 |         S += '*'; | 
 |         return; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } else if (const RecordType *RTy = PointeeTy->getAs<RecordType>()) { | 
 |       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_class *" to "#". | 
 |       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_class")) { | 
 |         S += '#'; | 
 |         return; | 
 |       } | 
 |       // GCC binary compat: Need to convert "struct objc_object *" to "@". | 
 |       if (RTy->getDecl()->getIdentifier() == &Idents.get("objc_object")) { | 
 |         S += '@'; | 
 |         return; | 
 |       } | 
 |       // fall through... | 
 |     } | 
 |     S += '^'; | 
 |     getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(PointeeTy); | 
 |  | 
 |     getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, false, ExpandPointedToStructures, | 
 |                                NULL); | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   if (const ArrayType *AT = | 
 |       // Ignore type qualifiers etc. | 
 |         dyn_cast<ArrayType>(T->getCanonicalTypeInternal())) { | 
 |     if (isa<IncompleteArrayType>(AT)) { | 
 |       // Incomplete arrays are encoded as a pointer to the array element. | 
 |       S += '^'; | 
 |  | 
 |       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S, | 
 |                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD); | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       S += '['; | 
 |  | 
 |       if (const ConstantArrayType *CAT = dyn_cast<ConstantArrayType>(AT)) | 
 |         S += llvm::utostr(CAT->getSize().getZExtValue()); | 
 |       else { | 
 |         //Variable length arrays are encoded as a regular array with 0 elements. | 
 |         assert(isa<VariableArrayType>(AT) && "Unknown array type!"); | 
 |         S += '0'; | 
 |       } | 
 |  | 
 |       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(AT->getElementType(), S, | 
 |                                  false, ExpandStructures, FD); | 
 |       S += ']'; | 
 |     } | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (T->getAs<FunctionType>()) { | 
 |     S += '?'; | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const RecordType *RTy = T->getAs<RecordType>()) { | 
 |     RecordDecl *RDecl = RTy->getDecl(); | 
 |     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? '(' : '{'; | 
 |     // Anonymous structures print as '?' | 
 |     if (const IdentifierInfo *II = RDecl->getIdentifier()) { | 
 |       S += II->getName(); | 
 |       if (ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl *Spec | 
 |           = dyn_cast<ClassTemplateSpecializationDecl>(RDecl)) { | 
 |         const TemplateArgumentList &TemplateArgs = Spec->getTemplateArgs(); | 
 |         std::string TemplateArgsStr | 
 |           = TemplateSpecializationType::PrintTemplateArgumentList( | 
 |                                             TemplateArgs.data(), | 
 |                                             TemplateArgs.size(), | 
 |                                             (*this).PrintingPolicy); | 
 |  | 
 |         S += TemplateArgsStr; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } else { | 
 |       S += '?'; | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (ExpandStructures) { | 
 |       S += '='; | 
 |       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator Field = RDecl->field_begin(), | 
 |                                    FieldEnd = RDecl->field_end(); | 
 |            Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) { | 
 |         if (FD) { | 
 |           S += '"'; | 
 |           S += Field->getNameAsString(); | 
 |           S += '"'; | 
 |         } | 
 |  | 
 |         // Special case bit-fields. | 
 |         if (Field->isBitField()) { | 
 |           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, | 
 |                                      (*Field)); | 
 |         } else { | 
 |           QualType qt = Field->getType(); | 
 |           getLegacyIntegralTypeEncoding(qt); | 
 |           getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(qt, S, false, true, | 
 |                                      FD); | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |     S += RDecl->isUnion() ? ')' : '}'; | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   if (T->isEnumeralType()) { | 
 |     if (FD && FD->isBitField()) | 
 |       EncodeBitField(this, S, T, FD); | 
 |     else | 
 |       S += 'i'; | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (T->isBlockPointerType()) { | 
 |     S += "@?"; // Unlike a pointer-to-function, which is "^?". | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Ignore protocol qualifiers when mangling at this level. | 
 |   if (const ObjCObjectType *OT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectType>()) | 
 |     T = OT->getBaseType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ObjCInterfaceType *OIT = T->getAs<ObjCInterfaceType>()) { | 
 |     // @encode(class_name) | 
 |     ObjCInterfaceDecl *OI = OIT->getDecl(); | 
 |     S += '{'; | 
 |     const IdentifierInfo *II = OI->getIdentifier(); | 
 |     S += II->getName(); | 
 |     S += '='; | 
 |     llvm::SmallVector<ObjCIvarDecl*, 32> Ivars; | 
 |     DeepCollectObjCIvars(OI, true, Ivars); | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0, e = Ivars.size(); i != e; ++i) { | 
 |       FieldDecl *Field = cast<FieldDecl>(Ivars[i]); | 
 |       if (Field->isBitField()) | 
 |         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, Field); | 
 |       else | 
 |         getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(Field->getType(), S, false, true, FD); | 
 |     } | 
 |     S += '}'; | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *OPT = T->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()) { | 
 |     if (OPT->isObjCIdType()) { | 
 |       S += '@'; | 
 |       return; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     if (OPT->isObjCClassType() || OPT->isObjCQualifiedClassType()) { | 
 |       // FIXME: Consider if we need to output qualifiers for 'Class<p>'. | 
 |       // Since this is a binary compatibility issue, need to consult with runtime | 
 |       // folks. Fortunately, this is a *very* obsure construct. | 
 |       S += '#'; | 
 |       return; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     if (OPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) { | 
 |       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(getObjCIdType(), S, | 
 |                                  ExpandPointedToStructures, | 
 |                                  ExpandStructures, FD); | 
 |       if (FD || EncodingProperty) { | 
 |         // Note that we do extended encoding of protocol qualifer list | 
 |         // Only when doing ivar or property encoding. | 
 |         S += '"'; | 
 |         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(), | 
 |              E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |           S += '<'; | 
 |           S += (*I)->getNameAsString(); | 
 |           S += '>'; | 
 |         } | 
 |         S += '"'; | 
 |       } | 
 |       return; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     QualType PointeeTy = OPT->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     if (!EncodingProperty && | 
 |         isa<TypedefType>(PointeeTy.getTypePtr())) { | 
 |       // Another historical/compatibility reason. | 
 |       // We encode the underlying type which comes out as | 
 |       // {...}; | 
 |       S += '^'; | 
 |       getObjCEncodingForTypeImpl(PointeeTy, S, | 
 |                                  false, ExpandPointedToStructures, | 
 |                                  NULL); | 
 |       return; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     S += '@'; | 
 |     if (OPT->getInterfaceDecl() && (FD || EncodingProperty)) { | 
 |       S += '"'; | 
 |       S += OPT->getInterfaceDecl()->getIdentifier()->getName(); | 
 |       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = OPT->qual_begin(), | 
 |            E = OPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |         S += '<'; | 
 |         S += (*I)->getNameAsString(); | 
 |         S += '>'; | 
 |       } | 
 |       S += '"'; | 
 |     } | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // gcc just blithely ignores member pointers. | 
 |   // TODO: maybe there should be a mangling for these | 
 |   if (T->getAs<MemberPointerType>()) | 
 |     return; | 
 |    | 
 |   if (T->isVectorType()) { | 
 |     // This matches gcc's encoding, even though technically it is | 
 |     // insufficient. | 
 |     // FIXME. We should do a better job than gcc. | 
 |     return; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   assert(0 && "@encode for type not implemented!"); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::getObjCEncodingForTypeQualifier(Decl::ObjCDeclQualifier QT, | 
 |                                                  std::string& S) const { | 
 |   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_In) | 
 |     S += 'n'; | 
 |   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Inout) | 
 |     S += 'N'; | 
 |   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Out) | 
 |     S += 'o'; | 
 |   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Bycopy) | 
 |     S += 'O'; | 
 |   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Byref) | 
 |     S += 'R'; | 
 |   if (QT & Decl::OBJC_TQ_Oneway) | 
 |     S += 'V'; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setBuiltinVaListType(QualType T) { | 
 |   assert(BuiltinVaListType.isNull() && "__builtin_va_list type already set!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   BuiltinVaListType = T; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCIdType(QualType T) { | 
 |   ObjCIdTypedefType = T; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCSelType(QualType T) { | 
 |   ObjCSelTypedefType = T; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCProtoType(QualType QT) { | 
 |   ObjCProtoType = QT; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCClassType(QualType T) { | 
 |   ObjCClassTypedefType = T; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | void ASTContext::setObjCConstantStringInterface(ObjCInterfaceDecl *Decl) { | 
 |   assert(ObjCConstantStringType.isNull() && | 
 |          "'NSConstantString' type already set!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   ObjCConstantStringType = getObjCInterfaceType(Decl); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve the template name that corresponds to a non-empty | 
 | /// lookup. | 
 | TemplateName | 
 | ASTContext::getOverloadedTemplateName(UnresolvedSetIterator Begin, | 
 |                                       UnresolvedSetIterator End) const { | 
 |   unsigned size = End - Begin; | 
 |   assert(size > 1 && "set is not overloaded!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *memory = Allocate(sizeof(OverloadedTemplateStorage) + | 
 |                           size * sizeof(FunctionTemplateDecl*)); | 
 |   OverloadedTemplateStorage *OT = new(memory) OverloadedTemplateStorage(size); | 
 |  | 
 |   NamedDecl **Storage = OT->getStorage(); | 
 |   for (UnresolvedSetIterator I = Begin; I != End; ++I) { | 
 |     NamedDecl *D = *I; | 
 |     assert(isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D) || | 
 |            (isa<UsingShadowDecl>(D) && | 
 |             isa<FunctionTemplateDecl>(D->getUnderlyingDecl()))); | 
 |     *Storage++ = D; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return TemplateName(OT); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a qualified | 
 | /// template name such as \c std::vector. | 
 | TemplateName | 
 | ASTContext::getQualifiedTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                                      bool TemplateKeyword, | 
 |                                      TemplateDecl *Template) const { | 
 |   // FIXME: Canonicalization? | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   QualifiedTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   QualifiedTemplateName *QTN = | 
 |     QualifiedTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |   if (!QTN) { | 
 |     QTN = new (*this,4) QualifiedTemplateName(NNS, TemplateKeyword, Template); | 
 |     QualifiedTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return TemplateName(QTN); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent | 
 | /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template apply. | 
 | TemplateName | 
 | ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                                      const IdentifierInfo *Name) const { | 
 |   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) && | 
 |          "Nested name specifier must be dependent"); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Name); | 
 |  | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   DependentTemplateName *QTN = | 
 |     DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (QTN) | 
 |     return TemplateName(QTN); | 
 |  | 
 |   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); | 
 |   if (CanonNNS == NNS) { | 
 |     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Name); | 
 |     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Name, Canon); | 
 |     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN = | 
 |       DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent type name canonicalization broken"); | 
 |     (void)CheckQTN; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos); | 
 |   return TemplateName(QTN); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// \brief Retrieve the template name that represents a dependent | 
 | /// template name such as \c MetaFun::template operator+. | 
 | TemplateName  | 
 | ASTContext::getDependentTemplateName(NestedNameSpecifier *NNS, | 
 |                                      OverloadedOperatorKind Operator) const { | 
 |   assert((!NNS || NNS->isDependent()) && | 
 |          "Nested name specifier must be dependent"); | 
 |    | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   DependentTemplateName::Profile(ID, NNS, Operator); | 
 |    | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   DependentTemplateName *QTN | 
 |     = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |    | 
 |   if (QTN) | 
 |     return TemplateName(QTN); | 
 |    | 
 |   NestedNameSpecifier *CanonNNS = getCanonicalNestedNameSpecifier(NNS); | 
 |   if (CanonNNS == NNS) { | 
 |     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     TemplateName Canon = getDependentTemplateName(CanonNNS, Operator); | 
 |     QTN = new (*this,4) DependentTemplateName(NNS, Operator, Canon); | 
 |      | 
 |     DependentTemplateName *CheckQTN | 
 |       = DependentTemplateNames.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |     assert(!CheckQTN && "Dependent template name canonicalization broken"); | 
 |     (void)CheckQTN; | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   DependentTemplateNames.InsertNode(QTN, InsertPos); | 
 |   return TemplateName(QTN); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | TemplateName  | 
 | ASTContext::getSubstTemplateTemplateParmPack(TemplateTemplateParmDecl *Param, | 
 |                                        const TemplateArgument &ArgPack) const { | 
 |   ASTContext &Self = const_cast<ASTContext &>(*this); | 
 |   llvm::FoldingSetNodeID ID; | 
 |   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage::Profile(ID, Self, Param, ArgPack); | 
 |    | 
 |   void *InsertPos = 0; | 
 |   SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage *Subst | 
 |     = SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.FindNodeOrInsertPos(ID, InsertPos); | 
 |    | 
 |   if (!Subst) { | 
 |     Subst = new (*this) SubstTemplateTemplateParmPackStorage(Self, Param,  | 
 |                                                            ArgPack.pack_size(), | 
 |                                                          ArgPack.pack_begin()); | 
 |     SubstTemplateTemplateParmPacks.InsertNode(Subst, InsertPos); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return TemplateName(Subst); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getFromTargetType - Given one of the integer types provided by | 
 | /// TargetInfo, produce the corresponding type. The unsigned @p Type | 
 | /// is actually a value of type @c TargetInfo::IntType. | 
 | CanQualType ASTContext::getFromTargetType(unsigned Type) const { | 
 |   switch (Type) { | 
 |   case TargetInfo::NoInt: return CanQualType(); | 
 |   case TargetInfo::SignedShort: return ShortTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::UnsignedShort: return UnsignedShortTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::SignedInt: return IntTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::UnsignedInt: return UnsignedIntTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::SignedLong: return LongTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLong: return UnsignedLongTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::SignedLongLong: return LongLongTy; | 
 |   case TargetInfo::UnsignedLongLong: return UnsignedLongLongTy; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(false && "Unhandled TargetInfo::IntType value"); | 
 |   return CanQualType(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                        Type Predicates. | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | /// isObjCNSObjectType - Return true if this is an NSObject object using | 
 | /// NSObject attribute on a c-style pointer type. | 
 | /// FIXME - Make it work directly on types. | 
 | /// FIXME: Move to Type. | 
 | /// | 
 | bool ASTContext::isObjCNSObjectType(QualType Ty) const { | 
 |   if (const TypedefType *TDT = dyn_cast<TypedefType>(Ty)) { | 
 |     if (TypedefDecl *TD = TDT->getDecl()) | 
 |       if (TD->getAttr<ObjCNSObjectAttr>()) | 
 |         return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getObjCGCAttr - Returns one of GCNone, Weak or Strong objc's | 
 | /// garbage collection attribute. | 
 | /// | 
 | Qualifiers::GC ASTContext::getObjCGCAttrKind(QualType Ty) const { | 
 |   if (getLangOptions().getGCMode() == LangOptions::NonGC) | 
 |     return Qualifiers::GCNone; | 
 |  | 
 |   assert(getLangOptions().ObjC1); | 
 |   Qualifiers::GC GCAttrs = Ty.getObjCGCAttr(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Default behaviour under objective-C's gc is for ObjC pointers | 
 |   // (or pointers to them) be treated as though they were declared | 
 |   // as __strong. | 
 |   if (GCAttrs == Qualifiers::GCNone) { | 
 |     if (Ty->isObjCObjectPointerType() || Ty->isBlockPointerType()) | 
 |       return Qualifiers::Strong; | 
 |     else if (Ty->isPointerType()) | 
 |       return getObjCGCAttrKind(Ty->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType()); | 
 |   } else { | 
 |     // It's not valid to set GC attributes on anything that isn't a | 
 |     // pointer. | 
 | #ifndef NDEBUG | 
 |     QualType CT = Ty->getCanonicalTypeInternal(); | 
 |     while (const ArrayType *AT = dyn_cast<ArrayType>(CT)) | 
 |       CT = AT->getElementType(); | 
 |     assert(CT->isAnyPointerType() || CT->isBlockPointerType()); | 
 | #endif | 
 |   } | 
 |   return GCAttrs; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                        Type Compatibility Testing | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | /// areCompatVectorTypes - Return true if the two specified vector types are | 
 | /// compatible. | 
 | static bool areCompatVectorTypes(const VectorType *LHS, | 
 |                                  const VectorType *RHS) { | 
 |   assert(LHS->isCanonicalUnqualified() && RHS->isCanonicalUnqualified()); | 
 |   return LHS->getElementType() == RHS->getElementType() && | 
 |          LHS->getNumElements() == RHS->getNumElements(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::areCompatibleVectorTypes(QualType FirstVec, | 
 |                                           QualType SecondVec) { | 
 |   assert(FirstVec->isVectorType() && "FirstVec should be a vector type"); | 
 |   assert(SecondVec->isVectorType() && "SecondVec should be a vector type"); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (hasSameUnqualifiedType(FirstVec, SecondVec)) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Treat Neon vector types and most AltiVec vector types as if they are the | 
 |   // equivalent GCC vector types. | 
 |   const VectorType *First = FirstVec->getAs<VectorType>(); | 
 |   const VectorType *Second = SecondVec->getAs<VectorType>(); | 
 |   if (First->getNumElements() == Second->getNumElements() && | 
 |       hasSameType(First->getElementType(), Second->getElementType()) && | 
 |       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel && | 
 |       First->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool && | 
 |       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecPixel && | 
 |       Second->getVectorKind() != VectorType::AltiVecBool) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | // ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - Compatibility testing for qualified id's. | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | /// ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol - return 'true' if 'lProto' is in the | 
 | /// inheritance hierarchy of 'rProto'. | 
 | bool | 
 | ASTContext::ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(ObjCProtocolDecl *lProto, | 
 |                                            ObjCProtocolDecl *rProto) const { | 
 |   if (lProto == rProto) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   for (ObjCProtocolDecl::protocol_iterator PI = rProto->protocol_begin(), | 
 |        E = rProto->protocol_end(); PI != E; ++PI) | 
 |     if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lProto, *PI)) | 
 |       return true; | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId - compare id<p,...> with id<p1,...> | 
 | /// return true if lhs's protocols conform to rhs's protocol; false | 
 | /// otherwise. | 
 | bool ASTContext::QualifiedIdConformsQualifiedId(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) { | 
 |   if (lhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rhs->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) | 
 |     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhs, rhs, false); | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible - compare  Class<p,...> and | 
 | /// Class<p1, ...>. | 
 | bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs,  | 
 |                                                       QualType rhs) { | 
 |   const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | 
 |   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | 
 |   assert ((lhsQID && rhsOPT) && "ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible"); | 
 |    | 
 |   for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), | 
 |        E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |     bool match = false; | 
 |     ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I; | 
 |     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(), | 
 |          E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { | 
 |       ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; | 
 |       if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto)) { | 
 |         match = true; | 
 |         break; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (!match) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |   } | 
 |   return true; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible - We know that one of lhs/rhs is an | 
 | /// ObjCQualifiedIDType. | 
 | bool ASTContext::ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType lhs, QualType rhs, | 
 |                                                    bool compare) { | 
 |   // Allow id<P..> and an 'id' or void* type in all cases. | 
 |   if (lhs->isVoidPointerType() || | 
 |       lhs->isObjCIdType() || lhs->isObjCClassType()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   else if (rhs->isVoidPointerType() || | 
 |            rhs->isObjCIdType() || rhs->isObjCClassType()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsQID = lhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType()) { | 
 |     const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsOPT = rhs->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | 
 |  | 
 |     if (!rhsOPT) return false; | 
 |  | 
 |     if (rhsOPT->qual_empty()) { | 
 |       // If the RHS is a unqualified interface pointer "NSString*", | 
 |       // make sure we check the class hierarchy. | 
 |       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { | 
 |         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), | 
 |              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs, | 
 |           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or | 
 |           // through its super class and categories. | 
 |           if (!rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) | 
 |             return false; | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |       // If there are no qualifiers and no interface, we have an 'id'. | 
 |       return true; | 
 |     } | 
 |     // Both the right and left sides have qualifiers. | 
 |     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), | 
 |          E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I; | 
 |       bool match = false; | 
 |  | 
 |       // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs, | 
 |       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or | 
 |       // through its super class and categories. | 
 |       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsOPT->qual_begin(), | 
 |            E = rhsOPT->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { | 
 |         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; | 
 |         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) || | 
 |             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) { | 
 |           match = true; | 
 |           break; | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |       // If the RHS is a qualified interface pointer "NSString<P>*", | 
 |       // make sure we check the class hierarchy. | 
 |       if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *rhsID = rhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { | 
 |         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsQID->qual_begin(), | 
 |              E = lhsQID->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |           // when comparing an id<P> on lhs with a static type on rhs, | 
 |           // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or | 
 |           // through its super class and categories. | 
 |           if (rhsID->ClassImplementsProtocol(*I, true)) { | 
 |             match = true; | 
 |             break; | 
 |           } | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |       if (!match) | 
 |         return false; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   const ObjCObjectPointerType *rhsQID = rhs->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType(); | 
 |   assert(rhsQID && "One of the LHS/RHS should be id<x>"); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const ObjCObjectPointerType *lhsOPT = | 
 |         lhs->getAsObjCInterfacePointerType()) { | 
 |     // If both the right and left sides have qualifiers. | 
 |     for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator I = lhsOPT->qual_begin(), | 
 |          E = lhsOPT->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |       ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = *I; | 
 |       bool match = false; | 
 |  | 
 |       // when comparing an id<P> on rhs with a static type on lhs, | 
 |       // see if static class implements all of id's protocols, directly or | 
 |       // through its super class and categories. | 
 |       // First, lhs protocols in the qualifier list must be found, direct | 
 |       // or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch. | 
 |       for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(), | 
 |            E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { | 
 |         ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; | 
 |         if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) || | 
 |             (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) { | 
 |           match = true; | 
 |           break; | 
 |         } | 
 |       } | 
 |       if (!match) | 
 |         return false; | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     // Static class's protocols, or its super class or category protocols | 
 |     // must be found, direct or indirect in rhs's qualifier list or it is a mismatch. | 
 |     if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *lhsID = lhsOPT->getInterfaceDecl()) { | 
 |       llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols; | 
 |       CollectInheritedProtocols(lhsID, LHSInheritedProtocols); | 
 |       // This is rather dubious but matches gcc's behavior. If lhs has | 
 |       // no type qualifier and its class has no static protocol(s) | 
 |       // assume that it is mismatch. | 
 |       if (LHSInheritedProtocols.empty() && lhsOPT->qual_empty()) | 
 |         return false; | 
 |       for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I = | 
 |            LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(), | 
 |            E = LHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I) { | 
 |         bool match = false; | 
 |         ObjCProtocolDecl *lhsProto = (*I); | 
 |         for (ObjCObjectPointerType::qual_iterator J = rhsQID->qual_begin(), | 
 |              E = rhsQID->qual_end(); J != E; ++J) { | 
 |           ObjCProtocolDecl *rhsProto = *J; | 
 |           if (ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(lhsProto, rhsProto) || | 
 |               (compare && ProtocolCompatibleWithProtocol(rhsProto, lhsProto))) { | 
 |             match = true; | 
 |             break; | 
 |           } | 
 |         } | 
 |         if (!match) | 
 |           return false; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// canAssignObjCInterfaces - Return true if the two interface types are | 
 | /// compatible for assignment from RHS to LHS.  This handles validation of any | 
 | /// protocol qualifiers on the LHS or RHS. | 
 | /// | 
 | bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT, | 
 |                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) { | 
 |   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType(); | 
 |   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If either type represents the built-in 'id' or 'Class' types, return true. | 
 |   if (LHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass() || | 
 |       RHS->isObjCUnqualifiedIdOrClass()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedId() || RHS->isObjCQualifiedId()) | 
 |     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0), | 
 |                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0), | 
 |                                              false); | 
 |    | 
 |   if (LHS->isObjCQualifiedClass() && RHS->isObjCQualifiedClass()) | 
 |     return ObjCQualifiedClassTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0), | 
 |                                                 QualType(RHSOPT,0)); | 
 |    | 
 |   // If we have 2 user-defined types, fall into that path. | 
 |   if (LHS->getInterface() && RHS->getInterface()) | 
 |     return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS); | 
 |  | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer - This routine is specifically written | 
 | /// for providing type-safty for objective-c pointers used to pass/return  | 
 | /// arguments in block literals. When passed as arguments, passing 'A*' where | 
 | /// 'id' is expected is not OK. Passing 'Sub *" where 'Super *" is expected is | 
 | /// not OK. For the return type, the opposite is not OK. | 
 | bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer( | 
 |                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT, | 
 |                                          const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT) { | 
 |   if (RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || LHSOPT->isObjCIdType()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |    | 
 |   if (LHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType()) { | 
 |     return RHSOPT->isObjCBuiltinType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   if (LHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || RHSOPT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) | 
 |     return ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(QualType(LHSOPT,0), | 
 |                                              QualType(RHSOPT,0), | 
 |                                              false); | 
 |    | 
 |   const ObjCInterfaceType* LHS = LHSOPT->getInterfaceType(); | 
 |   const ObjCInterfaceType* RHS = RHSOPT->getInterfaceType(); | 
 |   if (LHS && RHS)  { // We have 2 user-defined types. | 
 |     if (LHS != RHS) { | 
 |       if (LHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getDecl())) | 
 |         return false; | 
 |       if (RHS->getDecl()->isSuperClassOf(LHS->getDecl())) | 
 |         return true; | 
 |     } | 
 |     else | 
 |       return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |   return false; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// getIntersectionOfProtocols - This routine finds the intersection of set | 
 | /// of protocols inherited from two distinct objective-c pointer objects. | 
 | /// It is used to build composite qualifier list of the composite type of | 
 | /// the conditional expression involving two objective-c pointer objects. | 
 | static  | 
 | void getIntersectionOfProtocols(ASTContext &Context, | 
 |                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT, | 
 |                                 const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT, | 
 |       llvm::SmallVectorImpl<ObjCProtocolDecl *> &IntersectionOfProtocols) { | 
 |    | 
 |   const ObjCObjectType* LHS = LHSOPT->getObjectType(); | 
 |   const ObjCObjectType* RHS = RHSOPT->getObjectType(); | 
 |   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS must have an interface base"); | 
 |   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS must have an interface base"); | 
 |    | 
 |   llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> InheritedProtocolSet; | 
 |   unsigned LHSNumProtocols = LHS->getNumProtocols(); | 
 |   if (LHSNumProtocols > 0) | 
 |     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHS->qual_begin(), LHS->qual_end()); | 
 |   else { | 
 |     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> LHSInheritedProtocols; | 
 |     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(LHS->getInterface(), | 
 |                                       LHSInheritedProtocols); | 
 |     InheritedProtocolSet.insert(LHSInheritedProtocols.begin(),  | 
 |                                 LHSInheritedProtocols.end()); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   unsigned RHSNumProtocols = RHS->getNumProtocols(); | 
 |   if (RHSNumProtocols > 0) { | 
 |     ObjCProtocolDecl **RHSProtocols = | 
 |       const_cast<ObjCProtocolDecl **>(RHS->qual_begin()); | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0; i < RHSNumProtocols; ++i) | 
 |       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count(RHSProtocols[i])) | 
 |         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back(RHSProtocols[i]); | 
 |   } | 
 |   else { | 
 |     llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> RHSInheritedProtocols; | 
 |     Context.CollectInheritedProtocols(RHS->getInterface(), | 
 |                                       RHSInheritedProtocols); | 
 |     for (llvm::SmallPtrSet<ObjCProtocolDecl*,8>::iterator I =  | 
 |          RHSInheritedProtocols.begin(), | 
 |          E = RHSInheritedProtocols.end(); I != E; ++I)  | 
 |       if (InheritedProtocolSet.count((*I))) | 
 |         IntersectionOfProtocols.push_back((*I)); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// areCommonBaseCompatible - Returns common base class of the two classes if | 
 | /// one found. Note that this is O'2 algorithm. But it will be called as the | 
 | /// last type comparison in a ?-exp of ObjC pointer types before a  | 
 | /// warning is issued. So, its invokation is extremely rare. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::areCommonBaseCompatible( | 
 |                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Lptr, | 
 |                                           const ObjCObjectPointerType *Rptr) { | 
 |   const ObjCObjectType *LHS = Lptr->getObjectType(); | 
 |   const ObjCObjectType *RHS = Rptr->getObjectType(); | 
 |   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* LDecl = LHS->getInterface(); | 
 |   const ObjCInterfaceDecl* RDecl = RHS->getInterface(); | 
 |   if (!LDecl || !RDecl) | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |    | 
 |   while ((LDecl = LDecl->getSuperClass())) { | 
 |     LHS = cast<ObjCInterfaceType>(getObjCInterfaceType(LDecl)); | 
 |     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS, RHS)) { | 
 |       llvm::SmallVector<ObjCProtocolDecl *, 8> Protocols; | 
 |       getIntersectionOfProtocols(*this, Lptr, Rptr, Protocols); | 
 |  | 
 |       QualType Result = QualType(LHS, 0); | 
 |       if (!Protocols.empty()) | 
 |         Result = getObjCObjectType(Result, Protocols.data(), Protocols.size()); | 
 |       Result = getObjCObjectPointerType(Result); | 
 |       return Result; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |      | 
 |   return QualType(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::canAssignObjCInterfaces(const ObjCObjectType *LHS, | 
 |                                          const ObjCObjectType *RHS) { | 
 |   assert(LHS->getInterface() && "LHS is not an interface type"); | 
 |   assert(RHS->getInterface() && "RHS is not an interface type"); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Verify that the base decls are compatible: the RHS must be a subclass of | 
 |   // the LHS. | 
 |   if (!LHS->getInterface()->isSuperClassOf(RHS->getInterface())) | 
 |     return false; | 
 |  | 
 |   // RHS must have a superset of the protocols in the LHS.  If the LHS is not | 
 |   // protocol qualified at all, then we are good. | 
 |   if (LHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Okay, we know the LHS has protocol qualifiers.  If the RHS doesn't, then it | 
 |   // isn't a superset. | 
 |   if (RHS->getNumProtocols() == 0) | 
 |     return true;  // FIXME: should return false! | 
 |  | 
 |   for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator LHSPI = LHS->qual_begin(), | 
 |                                      LHSPE = LHS->qual_end(); | 
 |        LHSPI != LHSPE; LHSPI++) { | 
 |     bool RHSImplementsProtocol = false; | 
 |  | 
 |     // If the RHS doesn't implement the protocol on the left, the types | 
 |     // are incompatible. | 
 |     for (ObjCObjectType::qual_iterator RHSPI = RHS->qual_begin(), | 
 |                                        RHSPE = RHS->qual_end(); | 
 |          RHSPI != RHSPE; RHSPI++) { | 
 |       if ((*RHSPI)->lookupProtocolNamed((*LHSPI)->getIdentifier())) { | 
 |         RHSImplementsProtocol = true; | 
 |         break; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |     // FIXME: For better diagnostics, consider passing back the protocol name. | 
 |     if (!RHSImplementsProtocol) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |   } | 
 |   // The RHS implements all protocols listed on the LHS. | 
 |   return true; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::areComparableObjCPointerTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { | 
 |   // get the "pointed to" types | 
 |   const ObjCObjectPointerType *LHSOPT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | 
 |   const ObjCObjectPointerType *RHSOPT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (!LHSOPT || !RHSOPT) | 
 |     return false; | 
 |  | 
 |   return canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSOPT, RHSOPT) || | 
 |          canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSOPT, LHSOPT); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::canBindObjCObjectType(QualType To, QualType From) { | 
 |   return canAssignObjCInterfaces( | 
 |                 getObjCObjectPointerType(To)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), | 
 |                 getObjCObjectPointerType(From)->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// typesAreCompatible - C99 6.7.3p9: For two qualified types to be compatible, | 
 | /// both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type. | 
 | /// C99 6.2.7p1: Two types have compatible types if their types are the | 
 | /// same. See 6.7.[2,3,5] for additional rules. | 
 | bool ASTContext::typesAreCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS, | 
 |                                     bool CompareUnqualified) { | 
 |   if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) | 
 |     return hasSameType(LHS, RHS); | 
 |    | 
 |   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, false, CompareUnqualified).isNull(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::typesAreBlockPointerCompatible(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { | 
 |   return !mergeTypes(LHS, RHS, true).isNull(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// mergeTransparentUnionType - if T is a transparent union type and a member | 
 | /// of T is compatible with SubType, return the merged type, else return | 
 | /// QualType() | 
 | QualType ASTContext::mergeTransparentUnionType(QualType T, QualType SubType, | 
 |                                                bool OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                                bool Unqualified) { | 
 |   if (const RecordType *UT = T->getAsUnionType()) { | 
 |     RecordDecl *UD = UT->getDecl(); | 
 |     if (UD->hasAttr<TransparentUnionAttr>()) { | 
 |       for (RecordDecl::field_iterator it = UD->field_begin(), | 
 |            itend = UD->field_end(); it != itend; ++it) { | 
 |         QualType ET = it->getType().getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |         QualType MT = mergeTypes(ET, SubType, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified); | 
 |         if (!MT.isNull()) | 
 |           return MT; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// mergeFunctionArgumentTypes - merge two types which appear as function | 
 | /// argument types | 
 | QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,  | 
 |                                                 bool OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                                 bool Unqualified) { | 
 |   // GNU extension: two types are compatible if they appear as a function | 
 |   // argument, one of the types is a transparent union type and the other | 
 |   // type is compatible with a union member | 
 |   QualType lmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                               Unqualified); | 
 |   if (!lmerge.isNull()) | 
 |     return lmerge; | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType rmerge = mergeTransparentUnionType(rhs, lhs, OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                               Unqualified); | 
 |   if (!rmerge.isNull()) | 
 |     return rmerge; | 
 |  | 
 |   return mergeTypes(lhs, rhs, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::mergeFunctionTypes(QualType lhs, QualType rhs,  | 
 |                                         bool OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                         bool Unqualified) { | 
 |   const FunctionType *lbase = lhs->getAs<FunctionType>(); | 
 |   const FunctionType *rbase = rhs->getAs<FunctionType>(); | 
 |   const FunctionProtoType *lproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(lbase); | 
 |   const FunctionProtoType *rproto = dyn_cast<FunctionProtoType>(rbase); | 
 |   bool allLTypes = true; | 
 |   bool allRTypes = true; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Check return type | 
 |   QualType retType; | 
 |   if (OfBlockPointer) { | 
 |     QualType RHS = rbase->getResultType(); | 
 |     QualType LHS = lbase->getResultType(); | 
 |     bool UnqualifiedResult = Unqualified; | 
 |     if (!UnqualifiedResult) | 
 |       UnqualifiedResult = (!RHS.hasQualifiers() && LHS.hasQualifiers()); | 
 |     retType = mergeTypes(RHS, LHS, true, UnqualifiedResult); | 
 |   } | 
 |   else | 
 |     retType = mergeTypes(lbase->getResultType(), rbase->getResultType(), false, | 
 |                          Unqualified); | 
 |   if (retType.isNull()) return QualType(); | 
 |    | 
 |   if (Unqualified) | 
 |     retType = retType.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   CanQualType LRetType = getCanonicalType(lbase->getResultType()); | 
 |   CanQualType RRetType = getCanonicalType(rbase->getResultType()); | 
 |   if (Unqualified) { | 
 |     LRetType = LRetType.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |     RRetType = RRetType.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != LRetType) | 
 |     allLTypes = false; | 
 |   if (getCanonicalType(retType) != RRetType) | 
 |     allRTypes = false; | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: double check this | 
 |   // FIXME: should we error if lbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 && | 
 |   //                           rbase->getRegParmAttr() != 0 && | 
 |   //                           lbase->getRegParmAttr() != rbase->getRegParmAttr()? | 
 |   FunctionType::ExtInfo lbaseInfo = lbase->getExtInfo(); | 
 |   FunctionType::ExtInfo rbaseInfo = rbase->getExtInfo(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Compatible functions must have compatible calling conventions | 
 |   if (!isSameCallConv(lbaseInfo.getCC(), rbaseInfo.getCC())) | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // Regparm is part of the calling convention. | 
 |   if (lbaseInfo.getRegParm() != rbaseInfo.getRegParm()) | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // It's noreturn if either type is. | 
 |   // FIXME: some uses, e.g. conditional exprs, really want this to be 'both'. | 
 |   bool NoReturn = lbaseInfo.getNoReturn() || rbaseInfo.getNoReturn(); | 
 |   if (NoReturn != lbaseInfo.getNoReturn()) | 
 |     allLTypes = false; | 
 |   if (NoReturn != rbaseInfo.getNoReturn()) | 
 |     allRTypes = false; | 
 |  | 
 |   FunctionType::ExtInfo einfo(NoReturn, | 
 |                               lbaseInfo.getRegParm(), | 
 |                               lbaseInfo.getCC()); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (lproto && rproto) { // two C99 style function prototypes | 
 |     assert(!lproto->hasExceptionSpec() && !rproto->hasExceptionSpec() && | 
 |            "C++ shouldn't be here"); | 
 |     unsigned lproto_nargs = lproto->getNumArgs(); | 
 |     unsigned rproto_nargs = rproto->getNumArgs(); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Compatible functions must have the same number of arguments | 
 |     if (lproto_nargs != rproto_nargs) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Variadic and non-variadic functions aren't compatible | 
 |     if (lproto->isVariadic() != rproto->isVariadic()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     if (lproto->getTypeQuals() != rproto->getTypeQuals()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Check argument compatibility | 
 |     llvm::SmallVector<QualType, 10> types; | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0; i < lproto_nargs; i++) { | 
 |       QualType largtype = lproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |       QualType rargtype = rproto->getArgType(i).getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |       QualType argtype = mergeFunctionArgumentTypes(largtype, rargtype, | 
 |                                                     OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                                     Unqualified); | 
 |       if (argtype.isNull()) return QualType(); | 
 |        | 
 |       if (Unqualified) | 
 |         argtype = argtype.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |        | 
 |       types.push_back(argtype); | 
 |       if (Unqualified) { | 
 |         largtype = largtype.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |         rargtype = rargtype.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |       } | 
 |        | 
 |       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(largtype)) | 
 |         allLTypes = false; | 
 |       if (getCanonicalType(argtype) != getCanonicalType(rargtype)) | 
 |         allRTypes = false; | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (allLTypes) return lhs; | 
 |     if (allRTypes) return rhs; | 
 |  | 
 |     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = lproto->getExtProtoInfo(); | 
 |     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo; | 
 |     return getFunctionType(retType, types.begin(), types.size(), EPI); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (lproto) allRTypes = false; | 
 |   if (rproto) allLTypes = false; | 
 |  | 
 |   const FunctionProtoType *proto = lproto ? lproto : rproto; | 
 |   if (proto) { | 
 |     assert(!proto->hasExceptionSpec() && "C++ shouldn't be here"); | 
 |     if (proto->isVariadic()) return QualType(); | 
 |     // Check that the types are compatible with the types that | 
 |     // would result from default argument promotions (C99 6.7.5.3p15). | 
 |     // The only types actually affected are promotable integer | 
 |     // types and floats, which would be passed as a different | 
 |     // type depending on whether the prototype is visible. | 
 |     unsigned proto_nargs = proto->getNumArgs(); | 
 |     for (unsigned i = 0; i < proto_nargs; ++i) { | 
 |       QualType argTy = proto->getArgType(i); | 
 |        | 
 |       // Look at the promotion type of enum types, since that is the type used | 
 |       // to pass enum values. | 
 |       if (const EnumType *Enum = argTy->getAs<EnumType>()) | 
 |         argTy = Enum->getDecl()->getPromotionType(); | 
 |        | 
 |       if (argTy->isPromotableIntegerType() || | 
 |           getCanonicalType(argTy).getUnqualifiedType() == FloatTy) | 
 |         return QualType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     if (allLTypes) return lhs; | 
 |     if (allRTypes) return rhs; | 
 |  | 
 |     FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = proto->getExtProtoInfo(); | 
 |     EPI.ExtInfo = einfo; | 
 |     return getFunctionType(retType, proto->arg_type_begin(), | 
 |                            proto->getNumArgs(), EPI); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (allLTypes) return lhs; | 
 |   if (allRTypes) return rhs; | 
 |   return getFunctionNoProtoType(retType, einfo); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::mergeTypes(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,  | 
 |                                 bool OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                 bool Unqualified) { | 
 |   // C++ [expr]: If an expression initially has the type "reference to T", the | 
 |   // type is adjusted to "T" prior to any further analysis, the expression | 
 |   // designates the object or function denoted by the reference, and the | 
 |   // expression is an lvalue unless the reference is an rvalue reference and | 
 |   // the expression is a function call (possibly inside parentheses). | 
 |   assert(!LHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "LHS is a reference type?"); | 
 |   assert(!RHS->getAs<ReferenceType>() && "RHS is a reference type?"); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (Unqualified) { | 
 |     LHS = LHS.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |     RHS = RHS.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS), | 
 |            RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS); | 
 |  | 
 |   // If two types are identical, they are compatible. | 
 |   if (LHSCan == RHSCan) | 
 |     return LHS; | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the qualifiers are different, the types aren't compatible... mostly. | 
 |   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); | 
 |   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); | 
 |   if (LQuals != RQuals) { | 
 |     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type | 
 |     // mismatch. | 
 |     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() || | 
 |         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is | 
 |     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective | 
 |     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix | 
 |     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually | 
 |     // qualified __strong. | 
 |     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); | 
 |     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); | 
 |     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements"); | 
 |  | 
 |     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { | 
 |       return mergeTypes(LHS, getObjCGCQualType(RHS, Qualifiers::Strong)); | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong && LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { | 
 |       return mergeTypes(getObjCGCQualType(LHS, Qualifiers::Strong), RHS); | 
 |     } | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // Okay, qualifiers are equal. | 
 |  | 
 |   Type::TypeClass LHSClass = LHSCan->getTypeClass(); | 
 |   Type::TypeClass RHSClass = RHSCan->getTypeClass(); | 
 |  | 
 |   // We want to consider the two function types to be the same for these | 
 |   // comparisons, just force one to the other. | 
 |   if (LHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) LHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto; | 
 |   if (RHSClass == Type::FunctionProto) RHSClass = Type::FunctionNoProto; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Same as above for arrays | 
 |   if (LHSClass == Type::VariableArray || LHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray) | 
 |     LHSClass = Type::ConstantArray; | 
 |   if (RHSClass == Type::VariableArray || RHSClass == Type::IncompleteArray) | 
 |     RHSClass = Type::ConstantArray; | 
 |  | 
 |   // ObjCInterfaces are just specialized ObjCObjects. | 
 |   if (LHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) LHSClass = Type::ObjCObject; | 
 |   if (RHSClass == Type::ObjCInterface) RHSClass = Type::ObjCObject; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Canonicalize ExtVector -> Vector. | 
 |   if (LHSClass == Type::ExtVector) LHSClass = Type::Vector; | 
 |   if (RHSClass == Type::ExtVector) RHSClass = Type::Vector; | 
 |  | 
 |   // If the canonical type classes don't match. | 
 |   if (LHSClass != RHSClass) { | 
 |     // C99 6.7.2.2p4: Each enumerated type shall be compatible with char, | 
 |     // a signed integer type, or an unsigned integer type. | 
 |     // Compatibility is based on the underlying type, not the promotion | 
 |     // type. | 
 |     if (const EnumType* ETy = LHS->getAs<EnumType>()) { | 
 |       if (ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType() == RHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()) | 
 |         return RHS; | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (const EnumType* ETy = RHS->getAs<EnumType>()) { | 
 |       if (ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType() == LHSCan.getUnqualifiedType()) | 
 |         return LHS; | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // The canonical type classes match. | 
 |   switch (LHSClass) { | 
 | #define TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define ABSTRACT_TYPE(Class, Base) | 
 | #define NON_CANONICAL_UNLESS_DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: | 
 | #define NON_CANONICAL_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: | 
 | #define DEPENDENT_TYPE(Class, Base) case Type::Class: | 
 | #include "clang/AST/TypeNodes.def" | 
 |     assert(false && "Non-canonical and dependent types shouldn't get here"); | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::LValueReference: | 
 |   case Type::RValueReference: | 
 |   case Type::MemberPointer: | 
 |     assert(false && "C++ should never be in mergeTypes"); | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::ObjCInterface: | 
 |   case Type::IncompleteArray: | 
 |   case Type::VariableArray: | 
 |   case Type::FunctionProto: | 
 |   case Type::ExtVector: | 
 |     assert(false && "Types are eliminated above"); | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |   case Type::Pointer: | 
 |   { | 
 |     // Merge two pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info | 
 |     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<PointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     if (Unqualified) { | 
 |       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, false,  | 
 |                                      Unqualified); | 
 |     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); | 
 |     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |     return getPointerType(ResultType); | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::BlockPointer: | 
 |   { | 
 |     // Merge two block pointer types, while trying to preserve typedef info | 
 |     QualType LHSPointee = LHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     QualType RHSPointee = RHS->getAs<BlockPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     if (Unqualified) { | 
 |       LHSPointee = LHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |       RHSPointee = RHSPointee.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSPointee, RHSPointee, OfBlockPointer, | 
 |                                      Unqualified); | 
 |     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); | 
 |     if (getCanonicalType(LHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     if (getCanonicalType(RHSPointee) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |     return getBlockPointerType(ResultType); | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::ConstantArray: | 
 |   { | 
 |     const ConstantArrayType* LCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(LHS); | 
 |     const ConstantArrayType* RCAT = getAsConstantArrayType(RHS); | 
 |     if (LCAT && RCAT && RCAT->getSize() != LCAT->getSize()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     QualType LHSElem = getAsArrayType(LHS)->getElementType(); | 
 |     QualType RHSElem = getAsArrayType(RHS)->getElementType(); | 
 |     if (Unqualified) { | 
 |       LHSElem = LHSElem.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |       RHSElem = RHSElem.getUnqualifiedType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |      | 
 |     QualType ResultType = mergeTypes(LHSElem, RHSElem, false, Unqualified); | 
 |     if (ResultType.isNull()) return QualType(); | 
 |     if (LCAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     if (RCAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |     if (LCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, LCAT->getSize(), | 
 |                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0); | 
 |     if (RCAT) return getConstantArrayType(ResultType, RCAT->getSize(), | 
 |                                           ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0); | 
 |     const VariableArrayType* LVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(LHS); | 
 |     const VariableArrayType* RVAT = getAsVariableArrayType(RHS); | 
 |     if (LVAT && getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     if (RVAT && getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |     if (LVAT) { | 
 |       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because | 
 |       // the array's size has to be the size of LHS, but the type | 
 |       // has to be different. | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (RVAT) { | 
 |       // FIXME: This isn't correct! But tricky to implement because | 
 |       // the array's size has to be the size of RHS, but the type | 
 |       // has to be different. | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (getCanonicalType(LHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return LHS; | 
 |     if (getCanonicalType(RHSElem) == getCanonicalType(ResultType)) return RHS; | 
 |     return getIncompleteArrayType(ResultType, | 
 |                                   ArrayType::ArraySizeModifier(), 0); | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::FunctionNoProto: | 
 |     return mergeFunctionTypes(LHS, RHS, OfBlockPointer, Unqualified); | 
 |   case Type::Record: | 
 |   case Type::Enum: | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   case Type::Builtin: | 
 |     // Only exactly equal builtin types are compatible, which is tested above. | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   case Type::Complex: | 
 |     // Distinct complex types are incompatible. | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   case Type::Vector: | 
 |     // FIXME: The merged type should be an ExtVector! | 
 |     if (areCompatVectorTypes(LHSCan->getAs<VectorType>(), | 
 |                              RHSCan->getAs<VectorType>())) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   case Type::ObjCObject: { | 
 |     // Check if the types are assignment compatible. | 
 |     // FIXME: This should be type compatibility, e.g. whether | 
 |     // "LHS x; RHS x;" at global scope is legal. | 
 |     const ObjCObjectType* LHSIface = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>(); | 
 |     const ObjCObjectType* RHSIface = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectType>(); | 
 |     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface)) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |  | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |   case Type::ObjCObjectPointer: { | 
 |     if (OfBlockPointer) { | 
 |       if (canAssignObjCInterfacesInBlockPointer( | 
 |                                           LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), | 
 |                                           RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>())) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |     if (canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>(), | 
 |                                 RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>())) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |  | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return QualType(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// mergeObjCGCQualifiers - This routine merges ObjC's GC attribute of 'LHS' and | 
 | /// 'RHS' attributes and returns the merged version; including for function | 
 | /// return types. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::mergeObjCGCQualifiers(QualType LHS, QualType RHS) { | 
 |   QualType LHSCan = getCanonicalType(LHS), | 
 |   RHSCan = getCanonicalType(RHS); | 
 |   // If two types are identical, they are compatible. | 
 |   if (LHSCan == RHSCan) | 
 |     return LHS; | 
 |   if (RHSCan->isFunctionType()) { | 
 |     if (!LHSCan->isFunctionType()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |     QualType OldReturnType =  | 
 |       cast<FunctionType>(RHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType(); | 
 |     QualType NewReturnType = | 
 |       cast<FunctionType>(LHSCan.getTypePtr())->getResultType(); | 
 |     QualType ResReturnType =  | 
 |       mergeObjCGCQualifiers(NewReturnType, OldReturnType); | 
 |     if (ResReturnType.isNull()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |     if (ResReturnType == NewReturnType || ResReturnType == OldReturnType) { | 
 |       // id foo(); ... __strong id foo(); or: __strong id foo(); ... id foo(); | 
 |       // In either case, use OldReturnType to build the new function type. | 
 |       const FunctionType *F = LHS->getAs<FunctionType>(); | 
 |       if (const FunctionProtoType *FPT = cast<FunctionProtoType>(F)) { | 
 |         FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI = FPT->getExtProtoInfo(); | 
 |         EPI.ExtInfo = getFunctionExtInfo(LHS); | 
 |         QualType ResultType | 
 |           = getFunctionType(OldReturnType, FPT->arg_type_begin(), | 
 |                             FPT->getNumArgs(), EPI); | 
 |         return ResultType; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   // If the qualifiers are different, the types can still be merged. | 
 |   Qualifiers LQuals = LHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); | 
 |   Qualifiers RQuals = RHSCan.getLocalQualifiers(); | 
 |   if (LQuals != RQuals) { | 
 |     // If any of these qualifiers are different, we have a type mismatch. | 
 |     if (LQuals.getCVRQualifiers() != RQuals.getCVRQualifiers() || | 
 |         LQuals.getAddressSpace() != RQuals.getAddressSpace()) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |      | 
 |     // Exactly one GC qualifier difference is allowed: __strong is | 
 |     // okay if the other type has no GC qualifier but is an Objective | 
 |     // C object pointer (i.e. implicitly strong by default).  We fix | 
 |     // this by pretending that the unqualified type was actually | 
 |     // qualified __strong. | 
 |     Qualifiers::GC GC_L = LQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); | 
 |     Qualifiers::GC GC_R = RQuals.getObjCGCAttr(); | 
 |     assert((GC_L != GC_R) && "unequal qualifier sets had only equal elements"); | 
 |      | 
 |     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Weak || GC_R == Qualifiers::Weak) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |      | 
 |     if (GC_L == Qualifiers::Strong) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     if (GC_R == Qualifiers::Strong) | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   if (LHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType() && RHSCan->isObjCObjectPointerType()) { | 
 |     QualType LHSBaseQT = LHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     QualType RHSBaseQT = RHS->getAs<ObjCObjectPointerType>()->getPointeeType(); | 
 |     QualType ResQT = mergeObjCGCQualifiers(LHSBaseQT, RHSBaseQT); | 
 |     if (ResQT == LHSBaseQT) | 
 |       return LHS; | 
 |     if (ResQT == RHSBaseQT) | 
 |       return RHS; | 
 |   } | 
 |   return QualType(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                         Integer Predicates | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | unsigned ASTContext::getIntWidth(QualType T) const { | 
 |   if (const EnumType *ET = dyn_cast<EnumType>(T)) | 
 |     T = ET->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); | 
 |   if (T->isBooleanType()) | 
 |     return 1; | 
 |   // For builtin types, just use the standard type sizing method | 
 |   return (unsigned)getTypeSize(T); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | QualType ASTContext::getCorrespondingUnsignedType(QualType T) { | 
 |   assert(T->hasSignedIntegerRepresentation() && "Unexpected type"); | 
 |    | 
 |   // Turn <4 x signed int> -> <4 x unsigned int> | 
 |   if (const VectorType *VTy = T->getAs<VectorType>()) | 
 |     return getVectorType(getCorrespondingUnsignedType(VTy->getElementType()), | 
 |                          VTy->getNumElements(), VTy->getVectorKind()); | 
 |  | 
 |   // For enums, we return the unsigned version of the base type. | 
 |   if (const EnumType *ETy = T->getAs<EnumType>()) | 
 |     T = ETy->getDecl()->getIntegerType(); | 
 |    | 
 |   const BuiltinType *BTy = T->getAs<BuiltinType>(); | 
 |   assert(BTy && "Unexpected signed integer type"); | 
 |   switch (BTy->getKind()) { | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Char_S: | 
 |   case BuiltinType::SChar: | 
 |     return UnsignedCharTy; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Short: | 
 |     return UnsignedShortTy; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Int: | 
 |     return UnsignedIntTy; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Long: | 
 |     return UnsignedLongTy; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::LongLong: | 
 |     return UnsignedLongLongTy; | 
 |   case BuiltinType::Int128: | 
 |     return UnsignedInt128Ty; | 
 |   default: | 
 |     assert(0 && "Unexpected signed integer type"); | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |   } | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | ExternalASTSource::~ExternalASTSource() { } | 
 |  | 
 | void ExternalASTSource::PrintStats() { } | 
 |  | 
 | ASTMutationListener::~ASTMutationListener() { } | 
 |  | 
 |  | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 | //                          Builtin Type Computation | 
 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// | 
 |  | 
 | /// DecodeTypeFromStr - This decodes one type descriptor from Str, advancing the | 
 | /// pointer over the consumed characters.  This returns the resultant type.  If | 
 | /// AllowTypeModifiers is false then modifier like * are not parsed, just basic | 
 | /// types.  This allows "v2i*" to be parsed as a pointer to a v2i instead of | 
 | /// a vector of "i*". | 
 | /// | 
 | /// RequiresICE is filled in on return to indicate whether the value is required | 
 | /// to be an Integer Constant Expression. | 
 | static QualType DecodeTypeFromStr(const char *&Str, const ASTContext &Context, | 
 |                                   ASTContext::GetBuiltinTypeError &Error, | 
 |                                   bool &RequiresICE, | 
 |                                   bool AllowTypeModifiers) { | 
 |   // Modifiers. | 
 |   int HowLong = 0; | 
 |   bool Signed = false, Unsigned = false; | 
 |   RequiresICE = false; | 
 |    | 
 |   // Read the prefixed modifiers first. | 
 |   bool Done = false; | 
 |   while (!Done) { | 
 |     switch (*Str++) { | 
 |     default: Done = true; --Str; break; | 
 |     case 'I': | 
 |       RequiresICE = true; | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case 'S': | 
 |       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!"); | 
 |       assert(!Signed && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!"); | 
 |       Signed = true; | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case 'U': | 
 |       assert(!Signed && "Can't use both 'S' and 'U' modifiers!"); | 
 |       assert(!Unsigned && "Can't use 'S' modifier multiple times!"); | 
 |       Unsigned = true; | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case 'L': | 
 |       assert(HowLong <= 2 && "Can't have LLLL modifier"); | 
 |       ++HowLong; | 
 |       break; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   QualType Type; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Read the base type. | 
 |   switch (*Str++) { | 
 |   default: assert(0 && "Unknown builtin type letter!"); | 
 |   case 'v': | 
 |     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && | 
 |            "Bad modifiers used with 'v'!"); | 
 |     Type = Context.VoidTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'f': | 
 |     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && | 
 |            "Bad modifiers used with 'f'!"); | 
 |     Type = Context.FloatTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'd': | 
 |     assert(HowLong < 2 && !Signed && !Unsigned && | 
 |            "Bad modifiers used with 'd'!"); | 
 |     if (HowLong) | 
 |       Type = Context.LongDoubleTy; | 
 |     else | 
 |       Type = Context.DoubleTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 's': | 
 |     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 's'!"); | 
 |     if (Unsigned) | 
 |       Type = Context.UnsignedShortTy; | 
 |     else | 
 |       Type = Context.ShortTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'i': | 
 |     if (HowLong == 3) | 
 |       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedInt128Ty : Context.Int128Ty; | 
 |     else if (HowLong == 2) | 
 |       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongLongTy : Context.LongLongTy; | 
 |     else if (HowLong == 1) | 
 |       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedLongTy : Context.LongTy; | 
 |     else | 
 |       Type = Unsigned ? Context.UnsignedIntTy : Context.IntTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'c': | 
 |     assert(HowLong == 0 && "Bad modifiers used with 'c'!"); | 
 |     if (Signed) | 
 |       Type = Context.SignedCharTy; | 
 |     else if (Unsigned) | 
 |       Type = Context.UnsignedCharTy; | 
 |     else | 
 |       Type = Context.CharTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'b': // boolean | 
 |     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'b'!"); | 
 |     Type = Context.BoolTy; | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'z':  // size_t. | 
 |     assert(HowLong == 0 && !Signed && !Unsigned && "Bad modifiers for 'z'!"); | 
 |     Type = Context.getSizeType(); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'F': | 
 |     Type = Context.getCFConstantStringType(); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'G': | 
 |     Type = Context.getObjCIdType(); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'H': | 
 |     Type = Context.getObjCSelType(); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'a': | 
 |     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType(); | 
 |     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!"); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'A': | 
 |     // This is a "reference" to a va_list; however, what exactly | 
 |     // this means depends on how va_list is defined. There are two | 
 |     // different kinds of va_list: ones passed by value, and ones | 
 |     // passed by reference.  An example of a by-value va_list is | 
 |     // x86, where va_list is a char*. An example of by-ref va_list | 
 |     // is x86-64, where va_list is a __va_list_tag[1]. For x86, | 
 |     // we want this argument to be a char*&; for x86-64, we want | 
 |     // it to be a __va_list_tag*. | 
 |     Type = Context.getBuiltinVaListType(); | 
 |     assert(!Type.isNull() && "builtin va list type not initialized!"); | 
 |     if (Type->isArrayType()) | 
 |       Type = Context.getArrayDecayedType(Type); | 
 |     else | 
 |       Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'V': { | 
 |     char *End; | 
 |     unsigned NumElements = strtoul(Str, &End, 10); | 
 |     assert(End != Str && "Missing vector size"); | 
 |     Str = End; | 
 |  | 
 |     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error,  | 
 |                                              RequiresICE, false); | 
 |     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require vector ICE"); | 
 |      | 
 |     // TODO: No way to make AltiVec vectors in builtins yet. | 
 |     Type = Context.getVectorType(ElementType, NumElements, | 
 |                                  VectorType::GenericVector); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |   case 'X': { | 
 |     QualType ElementType = DecodeTypeFromStr(Str, Context, Error, RequiresICE, | 
 |                                              false); | 
 |     assert(!RequiresICE && "Can't require complex ICE"); | 
 |     Type = Context.getComplexType(ElementType); | 
 |     break; | 
 |   }       | 
 |   case 'P': | 
 |     Type = Context.getFILEType(); | 
 |     if (Type.isNull()) { | 
 |       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_stdio; | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |     break; | 
 |   case 'J': | 
 |     if (Signed) | 
 |       Type = Context.getsigjmp_bufType(); | 
 |     else | 
 |       Type = Context.getjmp_bufType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     if (Type.isNull()) { | 
 |       Error = ASTContext::GE_Missing_setjmp; | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |     } | 
 |     break; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // If there are modifiers and if we're allowed to parse them, go for it. | 
 |   Done = !AllowTypeModifiers; | 
 |   while (!Done) { | 
 |     switch (char c = *Str++) { | 
 |     default: Done = true; --Str; break; | 
 |     case '*': | 
 |     case '&': { | 
 |       // Both pointers and references can have their pointee types | 
 |       // qualified with an address space. | 
 |       char *End; | 
 |       unsigned AddrSpace = strtoul(Str, &End, 10); | 
 |       if (End != Str && AddrSpace != 0) { | 
 |         Type = Context.getAddrSpaceQualType(Type, AddrSpace); | 
 |         Str = End; | 
 |       } | 
 |       if (c == '*') | 
 |         Type = Context.getPointerType(Type); | 
 |       else | 
 |         Type = Context.getLValueReferenceType(Type); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     } | 
 |     // FIXME: There's no way to have a built-in with an rvalue ref arg. | 
 |     case 'C': | 
 |       Type = Type.withConst(); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     case 'D': | 
 |       Type = Context.getVolatileType(Type); | 
 |       break; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |    | 
 |   assert((!RequiresICE || Type->isIntegralOrEnumerationType()) && | 
 |          "Integer constant 'I' type must be an integer");  | 
 |  | 
 |   return Type; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | /// GetBuiltinType - Return the type for the specified builtin. | 
 | QualType ASTContext::GetBuiltinType(unsigned Id, | 
 |                                     GetBuiltinTypeError &Error, | 
 |                                     unsigned *IntegerConstantArgs) const { | 
 |   const char *TypeStr = BuiltinInfo.GetTypeString(Id); | 
 |  | 
 |   llvm::SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes; | 
 |  | 
 |   bool RequiresICE = false; | 
 |   Error = GE_None; | 
 |   QualType ResType = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, | 
 |                                        RequiresICE, true); | 
 |   if (Error != GE_None) | 
 |     return QualType(); | 
 |    | 
 |   assert(!RequiresICE && "Result of intrinsic cannot be required to be an ICE"); | 
 |    | 
 |   while (TypeStr[0] && TypeStr[0] != '.') { | 
 |     QualType Ty = DecodeTypeFromStr(TypeStr, *this, Error, RequiresICE, true); | 
 |     if (Error != GE_None) | 
 |       return QualType(); | 
 |  | 
 |     // If this argument is required to be an IntegerConstantExpression and the | 
 |     // caller cares, fill in the bitmask we return. | 
 |     if (RequiresICE && IntegerConstantArgs) | 
 |       *IntegerConstantArgs |= 1 << ArgTypes.size(); | 
 |      | 
 |     // Do array -> pointer decay.  The builtin should use the decayed type. | 
 |     if (Ty->isArrayType()) | 
 |       Ty = getArrayDecayedType(Ty); | 
 |  | 
 |     ArgTypes.push_back(Ty); | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   assert((TypeStr[0] != '.' || TypeStr[1] == 0) && | 
 |          "'.' should only occur at end of builtin type list!"); | 
 |  | 
 |   FunctionType::ExtInfo EI; | 
 |   if (BuiltinInfo.isNoReturn(Id)) EI = EI.withNoReturn(true); | 
 |  | 
 |   bool Variadic = (TypeStr[0] == '.'); | 
 |  | 
 |   // We really shouldn't be making a no-proto type here, especially in C++. | 
 |   if (ArgTypes.empty() && Variadic) | 
 |     return getFunctionNoProtoType(ResType, EI); | 
 |  | 
 |   FunctionProtoType::ExtProtoInfo EPI; | 
 |   EPI.ExtInfo = EI; | 
 |   EPI.Variadic = Variadic; | 
 |  | 
 |   return getFunctionType(ResType, ArgTypes.data(), ArgTypes.size(), EPI); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForFunction(const FunctionDecl *FD) { | 
 |   GVALinkage External = GVA_StrongExternal; | 
 |  | 
 |   Linkage L = FD->getLinkage(); | 
 |   switch (L) { | 
 |   case NoLinkage: | 
 |   case InternalLinkage: | 
 |   case UniqueExternalLinkage: | 
 |     return GVA_Internal; | 
 |      | 
 |   case ExternalLinkage: | 
 |     switch (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()) { | 
 |     case TSK_Undeclared: | 
 |     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization: | 
 |       External = GVA_StrongExternal; | 
 |       break; | 
 |  | 
 |     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition: | 
 |       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation; | 
 |  | 
 |     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration: | 
 |     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation: | 
 |       External = GVA_TemplateInstantiation; | 
 |       break; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   if (!FD->isInlined()) | 
 |     return External; | 
 |      | 
 |   if (!getLangOptions().CPlusPlus || FD->hasAttr<GNUInlineAttr>()) { | 
 |     // GNU or C99 inline semantics. Determine whether this symbol should be | 
 |     // externally visible. | 
 |     if (FD->isInlineDefinitionExternallyVisible()) | 
 |       return External; | 
 |  | 
 |     // C99 inline semantics, where the symbol is not externally visible. | 
 |     return GVA_C99Inline; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   // C++0x [temp.explicit]p9: | 
 |   //   [ Note: The intent is that an inline function that is the subject of  | 
 |   //   an explicit instantiation declaration will still be implicitly  | 
 |   //   instantiated when used so that the body can be considered for  | 
 |   //   inlining, but that no out-of-line copy of the inline function would be | 
 |   //   generated in the translation unit. -- end note ] | 
 |   if (FD->getTemplateSpecializationKind()  | 
 |                                        == TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration) | 
 |     return GVA_C99Inline; | 
 |  | 
 |   return GVA_CXXInline; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | GVALinkage ASTContext::GetGVALinkageForVariable(const VarDecl *VD) { | 
 |   // If this is a static data member, compute the kind of template | 
 |   // specialization. Otherwise, this variable is not part of a | 
 |   // template. | 
 |   TemplateSpecializationKind TSK = TSK_Undeclared; | 
 |   if (VD->isStaticDataMember()) | 
 |     TSK = VD->getTemplateSpecializationKind(); | 
 |  | 
 |   Linkage L = VD->getLinkage(); | 
 |   if (L == ExternalLinkage && getLangOptions().CPlusPlus && | 
 |       VD->getType()->getLinkage() == UniqueExternalLinkage) | 
 |     L = UniqueExternalLinkage; | 
 |  | 
 |   switch (L) { | 
 |   case NoLinkage: | 
 |   case InternalLinkage: | 
 |   case UniqueExternalLinkage: | 
 |     return GVA_Internal; | 
 |  | 
 |   case ExternalLinkage: | 
 |     switch (TSK) { | 
 |     case TSK_Undeclared: | 
 |     case TSK_ExplicitSpecialization: | 
 |       return GVA_StrongExternal; | 
 |  | 
 |     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDeclaration: | 
 |       llvm_unreachable("Variable should not be instantiated"); | 
 |       // Fall through to treat this like any other instantiation. | 
 |          | 
 |     case TSK_ExplicitInstantiationDefinition: | 
 |       return GVA_ExplicitTemplateInstantiation; | 
 |  | 
 |     case TSK_ImplicitInstantiation: | 
 |       return GVA_TemplateInstantiation;       | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return GVA_StrongExternal; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::DeclMustBeEmitted(const Decl *D) { | 
 |   if (const VarDecl *VD = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(D)) { | 
 |     if (!VD->isFileVarDecl()) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |   } else if (!isa<FunctionDecl>(D)) | 
 |     return false; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Weak references don't produce any output by themselves. | 
 |   if (D->hasAttr<WeakRefAttr>()) | 
 |     return false; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Aliases and used decls are required. | 
 |   if (D->hasAttr<AliasAttr>() || D->hasAttr<UsedAttr>()) | 
 |     return true; | 
 |  | 
 |   if (const FunctionDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(D)) { | 
 |     // Forward declarations aren't required. | 
 |     if (!FD->isThisDeclarationADefinition()) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |  | 
 |     // Constructors and destructors are required. | 
 |     if (FD->hasAttr<ConstructorAttr>() || FD->hasAttr<DestructorAttr>()) | 
 |       return true; | 
 |      | 
 |     // The key function for a class is required. | 
 |     if (const CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FD)) { | 
 |       const CXXRecordDecl *RD = MD->getParent(); | 
 |       if (MD->isOutOfLine() && RD->isDynamicClass()) { | 
 |         const CXXMethodDecl *KeyFunc = getKeyFunction(RD); | 
 |         if (KeyFunc && KeyFunc->getCanonicalDecl() == MD->getCanonicalDecl()) | 
 |           return true; | 
 |       } | 
 |     } | 
 |  | 
 |     GVALinkage Linkage = GetGVALinkageForFunction(FD); | 
 |  | 
 |     // static, static inline, always_inline, and extern inline functions can | 
 |     // always be deferred.  Normal inline functions can be deferred in C99/C++. | 
 |     // Implicit template instantiations can also be deferred in C++. | 
 |     if (Linkage == GVA_Internal  || Linkage == GVA_C99Inline || | 
 |         Linkage == GVA_CXXInline || Linkage == GVA_TemplateInstantiation) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |     return true; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   const VarDecl *VD = cast<VarDecl>(D); | 
 |   assert(VD->isFileVarDecl() && "Expected file scoped var"); | 
 |  | 
 |   if (VD->isThisDeclarationADefinition() == VarDecl::DeclarationOnly) | 
 |     return false; | 
 |  | 
 |   // Structs that have non-trivial constructors or destructors are required. | 
 |  | 
 |   // FIXME: Handle references. | 
 |   if (const RecordType *RT = VD->getType()->getAs<RecordType>()) { | 
 |     if (const CXXRecordDecl *RD = dyn_cast<CXXRecordDecl>(RT->getDecl())) { | 
 |       if (RD->hasDefinition() && | 
 |           (!RD->hasTrivialConstructor() || !RD->hasTrivialDestructor())) | 
 |         return true; | 
 |     } | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   GVALinkage L = GetGVALinkageForVariable(VD); | 
 |   if (L == GVA_Internal || L == GVA_TemplateInstantiation) { | 
 |     if (!(VD->getInit() && VD->getInit()->HasSideEffects(*this))) | 
 |       return false; | 
 |   } | 
 |  | 
 |   return true; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | CallingConv ASTContext::getDefaultMethodCallConv() { | 
 |   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object | 
 |   return ABI->getDefaultMethodCallConv(); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | bool ASTContext::isNearlyEmpty(const CXXRecordDecl *RD) const { | 
 |   // Pass through to the C++ ABI object | 
 |   return ABI->isNearlyEmpty(RD); | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | MangleContext *ASTContext::createMangleContext() { | 
 |   switch (Target.getCXXABI()) { | 
 |   case CXXABI_ARM: | 
 |   case CXXABI_Itanium: | 
 |     return createItaniumMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics()); | 
 |   case CXXABI_Microsoft: | 
 |     return createMicrosoftMangleContext(*this, getDiagnostics()); | 
 |   } | 
 |   assert(0 && "Unsupported ABI"); | 
 |   return 0; | 
 | } | 
 |  | 
 | CXXABI::~CXXABI() {} |